PROJECT MANUAL _ INVITATION TO BID City Centre Garage Stair

Document Sample
PROJECT MANUAL _ INVITATION TO BID City Centre Garage Stair Powered By Docstoc
					                            CAPITAL CITY DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION
                               121 N. 9TH STREET, #501, BOISE ID 83702




                PROJECT MANUAL & INVITATION TO BID

                                    City Centre Garage
                                 Stair Replacement Project




                                       Issued: February 8, 2011
                          Bids Due: Thursday, March 3, 2011, at 3:00 PM MST

                       PLEASE NOTE:
                       Bidders must register with CCDC by February 18, 2011,
                       at 5:00 PM MST to submit bids (see Part 1 – Section 5).




PROJECT CONSULTANTS

PROJECT MANAGER                         ENGINEER OF RECORD
ROB VAN DYKE                            NATHAN CHARLTON, P.E.
KPFF CONSULTING ENGINEERS               KPFF CONSULTING ENGINEERS
111 SW 5TH AVENUE, SUITE 2500           111 SW 5TH AVENUE, SUITE 2500
PORTLAND, OR 97204                      PORTLAND, OR 97204
503-227-3251                            503-227-3251
              PROJECT MANUAL & INVITATION TO BID


                                City Centre Garage
                             Stair Replacement Project


                                        CONTENTS
                                                                                          Page
Part 1: Invitation to Bid & Submission Instructions                                         2

        1.    Project Manual and Contract Documents                                           2
        2.    Scope of Work                                                                   3
        3.    Summary of Dates                                                                3
        4.    Submission Requirements                                                         4
        5.    Bidder Registration                                                             5
        6.    Pre Bid Conference                                                              6
        7.    Base Bid and Bid Alternate                                                      6
        8.    Coordination with ITD and ACHD                                                  6
        9.    Bid Security                                                                    7
       10.    Form of Contract                                                                7
       11.    Bid Opening; Award                                                              8
       12.    Selection Criteria                                                              8
       13.    Insurance Requirements                                                          9
       14.    Bond Requirements                                                              10
       15.    Questions                                                                      10

Attachment A: Project Area Map                                                               11
Attachment B: Legal Notice                                                                   12
Attachment C: Bid Form                                                                       13
Attachment D: Release Form                                                                   17
Attachment E: Contractor’s Affidavit Concerning Taxes                                        18

Part 2: ConsensusDOCSTM Contract – Contract Form & Supplementary Provisions                  19

Part 3: Technical Specifications                                                             23

Part 4: Drawings                                                                             24

Drawings prepared by KPFF and dated 1/27/2011 on 11” x 17” sheets follow this page. Full sized
drawings are separately bound and available for review beginning February 8, 2011 at:

      CCDC’s offices, 121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501, Boise ID 83702; 208-384-4264
      Idaho Associated General Contractors plan room, 1649 W. Shoreline Dr, Suite 100, Boise ID
       83702; 208-344-2531



INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                       Page 1 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
                                PART 1:
            INVITATION FOR BIDS & SUBMISSION INSTRUCTIONS

                                Issued: February 8, 2011
                   Bids Due: Thursday, March 3, 2011, at 3:00 p.m. MST

                   PLEASE NOTE:
                   Bidders must register with CCDC by February 18, 2011,
                   at 5:00 PM MST to submit bids (see Part 1 – Section 5).


Capital City Development Corporation (CCDC) is requesting sealed bids from public works
contractors licensed by the State of Idaho to remove and replace the existing steel stair systems
and to replace portions of the concrete landings in the stair towers at the City Centre Parking
Garage. The garage is located at 312 S. 9th Street, Boise ID. The garage is owned by Capital
City Development Corporation, Boise City’s urban renewal agency, and is operated by Republic
Parking Northwest, Inc. A map of the Project location is included as Attachment A. Legal notice
of this Invitation to Bid is being published on February 8 and 14, 2011. A copy of the legal
notice is included as Attachment B. A licensed public works contractor submitting a proposal in
response to this Invitation for Bids (“Bid”) is referred to as a “Bidder” in this Project Manual.

CCDC is the Project Owner and will serve as Project Administrator. CCDC has retained Rob
Van Dyke of KPFF Consulting Engineers, as its Project Manager for the Project.


1.     PROJECT MANUAL AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Project Manual consists of the items in Parts 1 through 4 inclusively in this document
(“Project Manual”) and all documents incorporated in the Project Manual by reference. The
Project Manual will be available at CCDC’s office, 121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501, Boise ID and on
CCDC’s website beginning on February 8, 2011. The link to CCDC’s website is
http://www.ccdcboise.com/AboutCCDC/JobOpportunities.aspx

The Contract Documents consist of the Project Manual, contract form as modified by the Project
Manual and as presented to the successful Bidder for execution; general, supplementary and
other conditions stated in the Project Manual; Technical Specifications, Drawings, and all
addenda issued by CCDC or the Project Manager; and the Bidder’s Bid (“Contract Documents”).

For purposes of the Contract Documents, the terms agreement and contract are equivalent.

Bidders shall notify CCDC of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error that they may discover upon
examination of the Project Manual. All questions and requests for clarification or modification of
the Project Manual shall be made in writing and addressed as follows:

       a.      All project-related questions should be directed to Rob Van Dyke, Project
               Manager, KPFF Consulting Engineers, 111 SW 5th Avenue, Suite 2500, Portland
               OR 97204; 503-227-3251; rob.vandyke@kpff.com.



INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                        Page 2 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
       b.      General questions should be directed to Max Clark, CCDC Parking & Facilities
               Director (mclark@ccdcboise.com) or Pam Sheldon, CCDC Contracts Manager
               (psheldon@ccdcboise.com), or by telephoning CCDC’s offices at (208) 384-
               4264.

The last day for Bidders to submit written questions or proposed modifications to the Project
Manual is February 23, 2011 at 5:00 PM MST. The last day for CCDC to issue Addenda is
February 24, 2011.

2.     SCOPE OF WORK

The Scope of Work (referred to as the “Work” or the “Project” in this Project Manual) will consist
of the following tasks as defined in the Contract Documents.

         a.    Removal of the existing steel stair systems on the northeast and northwest stair
               towers and replacement with a precast stringer and intermediate landing system.

         b.    Selective demolition and replacement of the slab edge at the existing cast in
               place main landings for the elevators and stairs. The Contractor shall remove all
               concrete until sound concrete is encountered and there are no signs of
               reinforcement corrosion.

         c.    Removal and replacement of existing slab edge channel and guardrails.

         d.    Addition of topping slab at elevator thresholds and adjustment of elevator stop
               elevation and thresholds to accommodate additional topping thickness.

         e.    Installation of gutter, drains and downspouts to carry water from main landings
               for elevators and stairs to underground storm sewer.

CCDC anticipates that the Project will be completed in two phases, with the stair replacement in
the northeast tower (located near the southwest corner of 8th and Main streets) proceeding first
and the stair replacement in the northwest tower (located on the southeast corner of 9th and
Main streets) proceeding second. Each phase is expected to take 60 days, for a total contract
time of 120 days.

3.     SUMMARY OF DATES

The following dates appear in Part1: Invitation to Bid & Submission Instructions of this Project
Manual and are summarized here for convenience only. Where there is a conflict between this
Summary and the text of Part 1, or if additional dates appear in Part 1, the text of Part 1 shall
govern. Bidders should refer to the text of Part 1 for more information.

                                                                                       PART 1 – SECT.
                 EVENT                                  DATE / TIME                          NO.
Bid issued.                                 February 8, 2011                          Face Page
                                                                                      Table of Contents
Legal Notice published                      February 8 and 14, 2011                   Attachment B
Pre-bid conference and site tour (#1)       February 16, 2011 at 1:30 PM MST          Section 6
Pre-bid conference and site tour (#2)       February 23, 2011 at 1:30 PM MST          Section 6

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                         Page 3 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
Last day for bidder registration            February 18, 2011 at 5:00 PM MST          Section 5
Last day for written questions /            February 23, 2011 at 5:00 PM MST          Section 1
proposed modifications to Project
Manual
Last day for addenda to be issued           February 24, 2011                         Section 1
Due date / time for objections to           February 25, 2011 at 5:00 PM MST          Section 4
Technical Specifications & bidding
procedures
Due date / time for bids                    March 3, 2011 at 3:00 PM MST              Section 4
Bid Opening                                 March 3, 2011                             Section 11
Bid Award                                   March 14, 2011 at CCDC Board              Section 11
                                            Meeting (starts at noon)
Notification of bid award sent to           March 14, 2011                            Section 11
registered bidders


4.     SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

All documents required for submission of a Bid shall be submitted in sealed opaque envelope.
Two (2) original submissions are required. Both originals may be included in the same sealed
envelope. If submitted by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing
envelope with the notation “SEALED BID ENCLOSED” on the face thereof. Sealed Bids must
be received at the address below by 3:00 p.m. MST on Thursday, March 3, 2011.

       Capital City Development Corp.
       ATTN: City Centre Stair Replacement Project
       121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501
       Boise ID 83702

Late or incomplete submissions will not be accepted. E-mail or fax submissions will not be
accepted. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated
for receipt of Bids.

CCDC will not pay any costs associated with submitting a sealed bid. CCDC reserves the right
to reject any or all submissions not conforming to the intent and purpose of the “Invitation for
Bids” whenever such action appears to be in the best interests of CCDC.

To be considered, each Bid must include the following minimum information:

       a. Completed Bid Form, a copy of which is attached. (Attachment C)

           If a bid addendum or addenda have been issued between February 8, 2011 and
           February 24, 2011, the bid form must include an acknowledgement that the Bidder
           has received the addendum or addenda and the Bid reflects this updated information
           (see Bid Form). Failure by Bidder to acknowledge that he or she has received the
           addendum or addenda may subject the Bidder to disqualification.

       b. Proof the Bidder submitting the Bid, and listed subcontractors, have a Public Works
          Contractor’s license issued by the State of Idaho. A copy of the license(s) and
          license numbers shall be provided with the Bid Form. General Contractors must

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                         Page 4 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
            possess a Class A Public Works License to submit an acceptable Bid. All
            subcontractors must, at the time the bid is submitted, posses a valid public works
            license in the applicable category for the work to be performed.

       c. Proof of Bid Security (see Sect. 9: Bid Security)

       d. Signed release form, a copy of which is attached (Attachment D)

       e. Signed Contractor’s Affidavit Concerning Taxes, a copy of which is attached
          (Attachment E)

No other material will be considered.

CCDC may, at its own discretion, accept such submissions as it deems to be in the best public
interest and in furtherance of the purposes of the Idaho Urban Renewal Law, or it may proceed
with further selection processes, or it may reject any and all submissions as provided for in the
Idaho Urban Renewal Law Title 50, Chapter 20 and Title 67, Chapter 28 of the Idaho Code.

CCDC reserves the right to, in its discretion, waive any immaterial defects in any submissions,
reissue the invitation for bids, and invite additional respondents to submit bids. CCDC reserves
the right to reject any submissions based on real or apparent conflict of interest, to reject any
submission containing inaccurate or misleading information, and to request additional data and
information from any and all respondents.

All submissions will be considered public documents under applicable state law except to the
extent portions of the submissions are otherwise protected under state law. Respondents
should segregate any proprietary or confidential material and provide an explanation as to why
such information should not be deemed a public record, citing the applicable portion of the
Idaho Public Records Act (Title 9, Chapter 3 of the Idaho Code).

Objections to the specifications set forth in Part 3: Technical Specifications and Part 4:
Drawings or to the bid procedures must be received in writing by CCDC no later than 5:00 p.m.,
MST on February 25, 2011.

5.     BIDDER REGISTRATION

All prospective bidders are required to submit a written “Notice of Intent to Submit Bid for the
City Centre Garage Stair Replacement Project” to CCDC no later than February 18, 2011, at
5:00 PM MST. Written notice may be submitted:

       a.      In person at CCDC offices
       b.      By U.S. Mail to Capital City Development Corp., ATTN: Michele Corral, 121 N. 9th
               St., Suite 501, Boise, ID, 83702
       c.      By email to mcorral@ccdcboise.com or
       d.      By Fax ATTN: Michele Corral (208-384-4267).

Written notice shall include the party’s name, company name, address, telephone number, fax
number and email address



INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                          Page 5 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
Failure to register by submitting written notice shall waive any obligation on behalf of CCDC to
provide notice of any alterations in the bid solicitation process and/or responses to questions
concerning the bidding process. A Bid from a Bidder who has not registered will not be
accepted. Each bidder bears all responsibility for obtaining confirmation from CCDC that the
bidder has been listed as a registered bidder.

6.     PRE-BID CONFERENCE

Pre-Bid Conferences will be held at1:30 p.m. MST on Wednesday, February 16, 2011, and on
Wednesday, February 23, 2011, at CCDC’s office, 121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501, Boise ID. A Site
Tour will be conducted following each pre-bid conference. Bidders are strongly encouraged to
attend one of these sessions.

7.     BASE BID AND BID ALTERNATE

       a.      Part 3: Technical Specifications, Section 017419 “Construction Waste
               Management and Disposal” includes a performance requirement to “achieve end
               of Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-
               hazardous solid waste generated by the Work” (see Article 017419.1.4.A.)
               Section 017419 also states that the “Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and
               other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor”
               (see Article 017419.3.3.B). The Base Bid shall include the anticipated cost of
               meeting the salvage/recycling performance requirement and the anticipated
               revenue received from salvage/recycling (see Attachment C - Bid Form in Part 1
               of the Project Manual.) (For purposes of this Sect. 7 and the Bid Form
               “Revenues” also includes savings, rebates, tax credits and other incentives.)

       b.      The Bid Form includes a Bid Alternate which would allow for construction waste
               management and disposal without the performance requirement for
               salvage/recycling (see Bid Form in Part 1 – Attachment C of the Project Manual.)

       c.      The CCDC Board of Commissioners will determine at the time of the bid award
               whether the Base Bid or Bid Alternate will be selected. If the Bid Alternate is
               selected, prior to execution of the Contract, CCDC will amend the Contract
               Documents as appropriate to address the removal of the recycling/salvage
               performance requirement.

8.     COORDINATION WITH ITD AND ACHD

       a.      Work will require approvals, permits and construction coordination with various
               governing agencies and other entities including but not limited to the Idaho
               Transportation Department (ITD) and Ada County Highway Department (ACHD).
               Owner has conducted preliminary discussions with ITD and ACHD regarding
               lane closures, lane restrictions, use of road right-of way, right-of-way permits,
               hoisting over the road right-of-way and traffic control for the Project (see Part 3:
               Technical Specifications, Section 011001.10.A and B).

       b.      For ITD and ACHD, Bidders are advised to consult with the following contact
               people in obtaining information for preparation of Bids. Owner is identifying these


INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                         Page 6 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
               contact people in an effort to provide consistent information on these issues from
               these agencies to all prospective bidders.

               (1)    Idaho Transportation Department
                      Pam Golden, P.E.
                      Development & Access Management Engineer – District 3
                      8150 Chinden Blvd
                      Garden City, ID 83707
                      (208) 334-8377 Office
                      (208) 334-8917 FAX
                      pam.golden@itd.idaho.gov

               (2)    Ada County Highway District
                      Larry Zurek
                      ACHD Permit Coordinator
                      3775 Adams Street
                      Garden City, ID 83714
                      (208) 387-6100 (Front Desk)
                      (208) 387-6308 (Direct)
                      lzurek@achdidaho.org

               (2)    The Project will require coordination, approvals and/or permits from
                      governing agencies and entities other than ITD and ACHD. Bidders have
                      responsibility for identifying and consulting with these other governing
                      agencies and entities in preparing Bids.

9.     BID SECURITY

All Bids shall be accompanied by a Bid Security that is not less than 5% of the greatest possible
bid amounts considering any alternatives in the form of either cash; a cashier’s check made out
to CCDC; a certified check made out to CCDC; or a bidder’s bond executed by a surety
company authorized to do business in the State of Idaho.

The Bidder’s security received from all Bidders will be returned promptly after CCDC and the
successful Bidder have executed the contract, or, if no award has been made within thirty days
after opening of bids, upon demand of Bidder at any time thereafter, so long as Bidder has not
been notified of the acceptance of its Bid.

If the successful Bidder fails to execute the contract described in Part 1, Sect. 10: Form of
Contract, the amount of the Bidder’s security shall be forfeited to CCDC, with the proceeds
being deposited in a designated fund out of which the reasonable expenses for procuring
substitute performance shall be paid. Additional information on the use of the Bid Security is
under Part 1: Sect. 12: Selection Criteria.

10.    FORM OF CONTRACT

This Invitation to Bid is for a Base Bid and a Bid Alternate for the Project (see Part 1, Sect. 7:
Base Bid and Bid Alternate. In case the contract for the Project is awarded, the form of the
contract shall be ConsensusDOCS 200: Standard Agreement and General Conditions Between
Owner and Contractor (“Consensus Contract”) as modified by supplementary conditions

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                         Page 7 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
prepared by CCDC. A sample copy of the Consensus Contract is available from CCDC offices.
Supplementary conditions are contained in Part 2 of this Project Manual. All Bidders should
review the proposed contract and the supplementary conditions. All the terms and conditions
of the contract are binding on the successful Bidder.

The CCDC Board of Commissioners will determine at the time of the bid award whether the
Base Bid or Bid Alternate will be selected. If the Bid Alternate is selected, prior to execution of
the Contract, CCDC will amend the Contract Documents as appropriate to address the removal
of the recycling/salvage performance requirement.

The contract will apply to the Base Bid or Bid Alternate as determined by CCDC.

By submitting a Bid, the Bidder represents that he has reviewed and taken into account the
provisions in the Consensus Contract form, as modified by the supplementary conditions
prepared by CCDC. (The Consensus Contract form may be reviewed at CCDC Office, 121 N.
9th Street, Suite 501, Boise ID.)

11.    BID OPENING; AWARD

Bids will be publicly opened immediately following the close of the bid period at 3:00 p.m. MST
on Thursday, March 3, 2011. It is anticipated that the CCDC Board of Commissioners will make
its decision on the bid award for the City Centre Garage Stair Replacement Project at its
meeting starting at 12:00 noon on Monday, March 14, 2011 MST in CCDC’s conference room,
121 N. 9th Street, Suite 500, Boise ID. Registered bidders will be notified of the Bid Award by
email or an alternate method on March 14, 2011. The selected Contractor and CCDC will
execute the contract within seven (7) days following the meeting at the above time and date,
provided that the selected Contractor has supplied evidence of required licenses, insurance and
bonding.

12.    SELECTION CRITERIA

Selection will be based on the procurement rules set forth in Idaho Code § 67-2805(3). Final
selection is made by the CCDC Board of Commissioners, which has the right to waive or alter
submission requirements or to reject any or all submissions, consistent with Idaho law.
CCDC reserves the right, on the refusal or failure of the successful Bidder to execute the CCDC
contract or furnish the required bonds as described in Part 1, Sect. 2: Scope of Work, to award
the CCDC contract to the next lowest qualified Bidder. If CCDC awards the CCDC contract to
the next lowest qualified Bidder, the amount of the lowest qualified Bidder’s security will be
applied by CCDC to the difference between the lowest responsive bid for the Project and the
next lowest responsive bid for the Project, and the surplus, if any, shall be returned to the lowest
Bidder if cash or check is used, or to the surety on the bidder’s bond if a bond is used, less
reasonable administrative costs not to exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the amount of the
Bidder’s security.

If any participating Bidder objects to CCDC’s award of the CCDC contract, such Bidder shall
respond in writing to the notice of the bid award from CCDC within seven (7) calendar days of
the date of transmittal of the notice, stating the express reason or reasons that the award
decision of CCDC’s governing board is in error. Upon receipt of such objection, CCDC’s
governing board or its designee shall review the award and determine whether to affirm the prior
award, modify the award, or choose to re-bid, setting forth the reason or reasons therefore.

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                          Page 8 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
After completion of the review process, CCDC may proceed as it deems to be in the public
interest.

The issuance of the Invitation for Bids and the receipt and evaluation of sealed bids does not
obligate CCDC to award a contract. CCDC will not pay costs incurred by Bidders in responding
to this Invitation for Bids. CCDC may in its discretion cancel this process at any time prior to
execution of a contract without liability.

13.      INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

The selected public works contractor will be required to provide proof of several insurance
coverages prior to commencement of the Work:

      1. Worker’s compensation insurance as required by applicable law or regulation;

      2. Employer’s liability insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 each accident for
         bodily injury, and $100,000 each employee for bodily injury by disease, and $500,000
         aggregate policy limit for bodily injury by disease;

      3. Commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of the
         Contractor with minimum limits of liability of $1,000,000 for each occurrence and
         $5,000,000 aggregate limit for both bodily injury and property damage. Contractor’s
         general liability insurance coverage shall name CCDC as an additional insured; and

      4. Commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of the
         Contractor’s subcontractors with minimum limits of liability of $1,000,000 for each
         occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate limit for both bodily injury and property damage.
         Contractor’s general liability insurance coverage shall name CCDC as an additional
         insured;

      5. Automobile liability insurance including coverage for owned, hired, and non-owned
         automobiles. The limits of liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 combined single
         limit each accident for bodily injury and property damage combined. Contractor shall
         require each of its subcontractors to include in their liability insurance policies coverage
         for automobile contractual liability; and

      6. Crane & Rigging insurance with minimum limits of liability of $5,000,000. This coverage
         may be provided by a subcontractor if CCDC and prime Contractor are named as
         additional insureds.

Contractor may include all subcontractors as insureds under the Contractor’s policies in lieu of
separate policies by each subcontractor.

The Contractor must furnish the Owner with the required certificates and endorsements for the
Contractor and for all subcontractors not included under the Contractor’s policy before work on
the project can begin.

All insurance required in this Agreement shall be procured from companies acceptable to CCDC
which are authorized to do business in Idaho.


INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                            Page 9 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
All insurance required in this Agreement shall include a provision that CCDC shall be given
thirty (30) days advance written notice prior to the effective date of any cancellation or material
change in insurance coverages.

Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without
interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination
of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. In addition, for any insurance
required that is obtained on a claims-made basis, "tail coverage" is required at the completion of
the Work for twenty-four (24) months. Continuous claims-made coverage will be acceptable in
lieu of "tail coverage" provided the retroactive date is on or before the effective date of this
Contract or twenty-four (24) months "prior acts" coverage is provided.

The following special hazards shall be covered by rider or riders to the policies required under
paragraphs above, or by separate policies of insurance. The said riders, policy or policies shall
be in the same amounts as set forth in paragraphs above, and shall cover the operation of
automobiles, trucks, tractors, cranes, loaders, dumpsters, and elevators, hoists and similar
heavy equipment if same are used on the work. If any or all of such items or equipment are not
to be operated on the work, contractor shall so advise the Project Manager by letter at time of
submitting proof of insurance to CCDC.

14.    BOND REQUIREMENTS

The selected public works contractor will be required to secure and pay for a Performance Bond
and a Payment Bond listing CCDC as an obligee, which bonds shall be for 100% of the
applicable Contract Amount. Bonds shall be issued by a surety company authorized to do
business in Idaho.


15.    QUESTIONS

       a.      All project-related questions should be directed to Rob Van Dyke, Project
               Manager, KPFF Consulting Engineers, 111 SW 5th Avenue, Suite 2500, Portland
               OR 97204; 503-227-3251; rob.vandyke@kpff.com.

       b.      General questions should be directed to Max Clark, CCDC Parking & Facilities
               Director (mclark@ccdcboise.com) or Pam Sheldon, CCDC Contracts Manager
               (psheldon@ccdcboise.com), or by telephoning CCDC’s offices at (208) 384-
               4264.




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                         Page 10 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
                                     ATTACHMENT A
                                   PROJECT AREA MAP




                                        MAIN ST




                                        FRONT ST




                                                        CAPITOL BLVD
                                   ST




                                                   ST
                                   TH




                                                  TH
                                   9




                                                   8




                                        MYRTLE ST




              CITY CENTRE GARAGE
                      TH
              312 S. 9 STREET, BOISE ID.




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT        Page 11 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
                                       ATTACHMENT B
                                       LEGAL NOTICE


                                INVITATION FOR BIDS
                      CITY CENTRE STAIR REPLACEMENT PROJECT



Capital City Development Corporation (“CCDC”), the urban renewal agency the city of Boise,
Idaho invites contractors holding an active Class A public works contractor license issued by the
State of Idaho to submit a sealed bid to construct the City Centre Stair Replacement Project.
Work will consist of removal and replacement of the steel stair system and partial replacement
of the concrete landings in the stair towers for the City Centre parking garage. The City Centre
Garage is located at 312 S. 9th Street, Boise ID. Interested individuals and firms are invited to
obtain submission instructions, plans and specifications by visiting the CCDC web site,
http://www.ccdcboise.com/AboutCCDC/JobOpportunities.aspx . The submission materials,
technical specifications and drawings will be posted on the website and be available at CCDC’s
office beginning on February 8, 2011. CCDC’s office is at 121 N. 9th St., Ste. 501, Boise, ID;
office hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.

Prospective bidders are required to register in writing with CCDC by February 18, 2011 at 5:00
p.m. MST. Registration is required to submit a bid. A registration form is posted on the CCDC
website with bid materials.

CCDC will hold pre-bid conferences and site tours for prospective bidders and all interested
parties at CCDC’s office at 1:30 p.m., MST, on February 16 and 23, 2011.

Submissions will be accepted until 3:00 p.m., MST on March 3, 2011. Bids will be opened
immediately following the submission deadline. The CCDC Board of Commissioners will make
a decision on the bid award at the Board meeting on March 14, 2011, which starts at 12:00
noon in CCDC’s conference room. Late or incomplete submissions will not be accepted. E-mail
or FAX submissions will not be accepted. For further information, call Max Clark, CCDC
Parking & Facilities Manager Development Manager at (208) 384-4264.

CCDC will not pay any costs associated with submitting a sealed bid. CCDC reserves the right
to reject any or all submissions not conforming to the intent and purpose of the “Invitation for
Bids” whenever such action appears to be in the best interests of CCDC.

Published February 8 and 14, 2011.




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                      Page 12 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
                                        ATTACHMENT C
                                          BID FORM


TO:                            Capital City Development Corporation
                               ATTN: CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLACEMENT
                               PROJECT
                               121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501
                               Boise, Idaho 83702

PROJECT:                       CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLACEMENT PROJECT

PROJECT LOCATION:              312 S. 9th Street, Boise ID
                               (See Invitation to Bid - Attachment A for map.)

PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE ALL REQUIRED INFORMATION

DATE:                  ________________________

SUBMITTED BY:

Name of Firm:          ____________________________________________________
Name:                  ____________________________________________________
Title:                 ____________________________________________________
Address:               ____________________________________________________
                       ____________________________________________________
Project Mgr (if different than signer): ________________________________________
Address (if different than signer):   ________________________________________
Telephone:             ____________________________________________________
E-Mail:                ____________________________________________________

Idaho Public Works Contractor’s License No.           ____________________________

(A copy of the Public Works Contractor’s License issued by the State of Idaho to Bidder must be
included in your submission.)

1.        BASE BID (“Bid”)

Having examined the Project Location and the Technical Specifications and Drawings prepared
by KPFF Consulting Engineers, dated January 27, 2011, for the above referenced project and
included in Parts 3 and Part 4 of the Project Manual; and being familiar with all of the conditions
surrounding the proposed Project including the availability of materials and labor the
undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials and supplies as specified, and to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents within the time set forth therein
and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in bonding,

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                        Page 13 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
obtaining insurance and performing the Work required under the Contract Documents, of which
this Bid is a part.

Base Bid: The Base Bid shall include the anticipated cost of meeting the salvage/recycling
performance requirement and the anticipated revenue received from salvage/recycling Part 3:
Technical Specifications, Section 017419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal”,
Article 017419.1.4.A. and Article 017419.3.3.B. (See Part 1, Sect. 7 of this Project Manual for
more information on the base bid.)

Bidder agrees to perform all of the work for the Project, as described in the Project Manual,
including but not limited to all applicable specifications and drawings, for the sum of:

Cost of Project (Less Cost & Revenue from Recycling/Salvage)        $___________________
Cost of Recycling / Salvaging                                       $___________________
Less: Revenue from Recycling / Salvaging                            $___________________

Total Cost of Project:

____________________________________________________ ($___________________)
 In words                                               In numbers


Bid Alternate: Bid Alternate shall be the project cost without the performance requirement for
salvage/recycling in Part 3: Technical Specifications, Section 017419 “Construction Waste
Management and Disposal”, Article 017419.1.4.A. (See Part 1, Sect. 7 of this Project Manual
for more information on the bid alternate.


____________________________________________________ ($___________________)
 In words                                               In numbers


The Bidder agrees that this Bid and Bid Alternate are good and may not be withdrawn for a
period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.

2.     ACCEPTANCE

This Bid shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for thirty (30) days from Bid closing
date.

Within seven (7) calendar days from receiving a written notice of acceptance of this Bid, Bidder
shall execute the Contract and shall deliver evidence of required insurance coverages and
bonds in the amounts required by Part 1: Sect.13 and 14.

3.     CONTRACT TIME

Bidder hereby agrees to commence the Work, on a date to be specified in writing by CCDC as
part of a “Notice to Proceed” and to substantially complete the Work in sequence and within 120
calendar days thereafter, as stipulated in the Project Manual. Bidder further agrees to pay as
liquidated damages, the sum of TWO HUNDRED FIFTY dollars ($250.00) for each consecutive

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                       Page 14 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
day thereafter that the Work is not substantially complete, provided that if the Work is complete
and has been accepted by the Owner. Bidder agrees to notify CCDC in a timely manner if the
Work cannot be completed within the specified time frame, and provide an explanation of why
the Work is delayed.

4.      SUBCONTRACTORS

Pursuant to Section 67-2310, Idaho Code, commonly known as the naming law, the names and
addresses of subcontractors are as follows:

(Bidder shall add lines on a separate page for additional subcontractors if needed.)

Plumbing (PWCL Category 15400)
     Name:     ________________________________________________________________
     Address: ________________________________________________________________
     Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. _____________________________________
     Idaho Plumbing Contractors License No. ________________________________________

Heating Ventilating & Air Conditioning (PWCL Category 15700-HVAC)
     Name:     ________________________________________________________________
     Address: ________________________________________________________________
     Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. _____________________________________
     Idaho HVAC Contractors License No. ___________________________________________

Electrical (PWCL Category 1600)
     Name:     ________________________________________________________________
     Address: ________________________________________________________________
     Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. _____________________________________
     Idaho Electrical Contractors License No. ________________________________________

Other (Identify Category): ____________________________

     Name:     ________________________________________________________________
     Address: ________________________________________________________________
     Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. _____________________________________

Other (Identify Category): ____________________________

     Name:     ________________________________________________________________
     Address: ________________________________________________________________
     Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. _____________________________________

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                        Page 15 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
Other (Identify Category): ____________________________

     Name:     ________________________________________________________________
     Address: ________________________________________________________________
     Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. _____________________________________

Each subcontractor required by Idaho State Code to have a Public Works Contractor’s License
shall provide his or her contractor’s license number in the space provided above unless
exempted by Idaho Code Section 54-1903(i).

6.      ADDENDA

The following Addenda have been received by Bidder. The modifications to the Contract
Documents, including but not limited to the Project Manual, noted therein have been considered
and all costs thereto are induced in the Bid Sum.

Addendum No. _____________________________ Dated ______________________
Addendum No. _____________________________ Dated ______________________
Addendum No. _____________________________ Dated ______________________
Addendum No. _____________________________ Dated ______________________

(If additional addenda are received by Bidder, Bidder shall add lines to indicated the receipt of
the additional addenda and list and date them either here or on a separate page.)

7.      BID FORM SIGNATURE(S)

The Corporate Seal of




(Please print full name of your Proprietorship, Partnership or Corporation)

was hereto affixed in the presence of:


Authorized Signing Representative                                             Title


Dated this _____ day of ____________________, 2011.


END OF BID FORM




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                        Page 16 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
                                         ATTACHMENT D
                                           RELEASE

The undersigned has read and fully accepts the Capital City Development Corporation’s
(“CCDC”), discretion and non-liability as stipulated herein, and expressly for, but not limited to,
CCDC’s decision to proceed with a selection process in response to the Invitation for Bids for
City Centre Garage Stair Replacement Project (“Project”).

        A. Discretion of CCDC:

      CCDC reserves the right in its sole discretion and judgment for whatever reason it
deems appropriate to, at any time unless contrary to applicable state law:

        1)      Modify or suspend any and all aspects of the process seeking a contractor to
                construct the Project.
        2)      Obtain further information from any person, entity, or group, including, but not
                limited to, any person, entity, or group responding to CCDC’s Invitation for Bids
                (any such person, entity, or group responding is, for convenience, hereinafter
                referred to as “Bidder”), and to ascertain the depth of Bidder’s capability and
                experience for construction of the Project and in any and all other respects to
                meet with and consult with any Bidder or any other person, entity, or group;
        3)      Waive any formalities or defects as to form, procedure, or content with respect to
                its Invitation for Bids and any responses by any Bidder thereto;
        4)      Accept or reject any sealed bid received in response to the Invitation for Bids,
                including any sealed bid submitted by the undersigned; or select any one
                submission over another;
        5)      Accept or reject all or any part of any materials, plans, drawings, implementation
                programs, schedules, phrasings and proposals or statements, including, but not
                limited to, the nature and type of Bid.

        B. Non-Liability of CCDC

        1)      The undersigned agrees that CCDC shall have no liability whatsoever of any kind
                or character, directly or indirectly, by reason of all or any decision made at the
                discretion of CCDC as identified above.
        2)      The undersigned, including all team members, have carefully and thoroughly
                reviewed the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Project Manual
                and have found them to be complete and free from ambiguities and sufficient for
                their intended purpose.

Bidder’s Signature: _______________________________
Print Name:          _______________________________
Print Title:         _______________________________
Name of Firm:        _______________________________
Date:                _______________________________

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                          Page 17 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
                                 ATTACHMENT E
                     CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING TAXES



STATE OF _____________________

COUNTY OF ___________________

Pursuant to the Idaho Code, Title 63, Chapter 15, I the undersigned, being duly sworn, depose
and certify that all taxes, excises and license fees due to the State of Idaho and its taxing units,
for which I or my property is liable, then due or delinquent, have been paid, or arrangements
have been made, before entering into a contract for construction of any public works in the State
of Idaho.


______________________________
Name of Contractor

______________________________
Address

______________________________
City and State


By: ___________________________
 Authorized Representative



Subscribed and sworn to before me this ________ day of _______________ 20__.

______________________________
Notary Public, residing at

______________________________

Commission Expires: ______________




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                         Page 18 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
                                           PART 2


                  CONSENSUSDOCSTM CONTRACT
           CONTRACT FORM & SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS


A.     CONTRACT FORM

The form of the Contract will be a ConsensusDOCS 200: Standard Agreement and General
Conditions Between Owner and Contractor as modified by CCDC. The Consensus Contract
form may be reviewed at CCDC Office, 121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501, Boise ID. The language of
the ConsensusDOCS 200 form is subject to additional change and/or modification prior
to execution with the successful Bidder.

B.     SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

For purposes of these supplementary conditions, CCDC and Owner are equivalent terms.

1.      RIGHT OF CONTROL: CCDC agrees that it will have no right to control or direct the
details, manner, or means by which CONTRACTOR accomplishes the results of the services
performed hereunder. CONTRACTOR has no obligation to work any particular hours or days or
any particular number of hours or days. CONTRACTOR agrees, however, that his or her other
contracts and services shall not interfere with the performance of his or her services under this
Agreement. CCDC agrees to coordinate project schedules, respective commencements and
deadlines with CONTRACTOR.

2.     INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP: CONTRACTOR is an independent
CONTRACTOR and is not an employee, servant, agent, partner, or joint venturer of CCDC.
CCDC shall determine the work to be done by CONTRACTOR, but CONTRACTOR shall
determine the legal means by which it accomplishes the work specified by CCDC. This
Agreement shall not be construed to create any employer-employee relationship between
CCDC and CONTRACTOR.

3.      RECORDS ACCESS AND AUDITS: CONTRACTOR shall maintain complete and
accurate records with respect to costs incurred and manpower expended under this Agreement.
All such records shall be maintained according to generally accepted accounting principles,
shall be clearly identified, and shall be readily accessible. Such records shall be available for
review by CCDC representatives for three (3) years after final payment. Copies shall be made
available upon request.

4.       FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL PAYROLL TAXES: Neither federal, state or local
income taxes, nor payroll taxes of any kind shall be withheld and paid by CCDC on behalf of
CONTRACTOR or the employees of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall not be treated as
an employee with respect to the services performed hereunder for federal or state tax purposes.
CONTRACTOR understands that CONTRACTOR is responsible to pay, according to law,
CONTRACTOR's income tax. CONTRACTOR further understands that CONTRACTOR may be
liable for self-employment (Social Security) tax to be paid by CONTRACTOR according to law.


INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                      Page 19 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
5.     LICENSES AND LAW: CONTRACTOR represents that it possesses the requisite skill,
knowledge, and experience necessary, as well as all licenses required to perform the services
under this Agreement. CONTRACTOR further agrees to comply with all applicable laws,
ordinances, and codes of Federal, State and local governments in the performance of the
services hereunder.

6.      FRINGE BENEFITS: Because CONTRACTOR is engaged in its own independently
established business, CONTRACTOR is not eligible for, and shall not participate in, any
employee pension, health, or other fringe benefit plans of CCDC.

7.     EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, MATERIALS OR SUPPLIES: CONTRACTOR shall supply, at
CONTRACTOR's sole expense, all equipment, tools, materials and/or supplies to accomplish
the services to be provided herein.

8.     TERM OF AGREEMENT: This Agreement shall begin on the date the Agreement is
signed by CCDC and shall continue until the CONTRACTOR completes the specified work or
the Agreement is terminated by either party.

9.      ENTIRE AGREEMENT: This Agreement, along with any and all Exhibits , attached
hereto and incorporated herein by reference, contains the entire Agreement of the parties and
supersedes any and all other agreements or understandings, oral or written, whether previous
to the execution hereof or contemporaneous herewith.

10.     GENERAL ADMINISTRATION AND MANAGEMENT: The Executive Director of CCDC,
or his/her designee, shall be CCDC's representative, and shall oversee and approve all services
to be performed, coordinate all communications, review and approve all invoices, and carry out
any and all tasks as may be required under this Agreement.

11.    AMENDMENTS: This Agreement, including the amount of compensation and the scope
of work, may be amended only in writing, upon mutual agreement of both CCDC and
CONTRACTOR.

12.    NOTICES: Any and all notices required to be given by either of the parties hereto,
unless otherwise stated in this Agreement shall be in writing and be deemed communicated
when mailed in the United States mail, certified, return receipt requested, addresses as follows:

CCDC:
Max Clark, Parking & Facilities Director
Capital City Development Corporation
121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501
Boise, ID 83702
(208) 384-4264

To CONTRACTOR:

Company               ____________________
Contact Person        ____________________
Title                 ____________________
Address               ____________________

INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                       Page 20 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
City / State / Zip    ____________________
Telephone #           ____________________
Email                 ____________________


(Telephone numbers are listed here for convenience and not to be used for notices required to
be in writing.)

 13.    DISCRIMINATION PROHIBITED: In performing the services required herein,
CONTRACTOR shall not discriminate against any person on the basis of race, color, religion,
sex, national origin or ancestry, age or handicap. Violation of this section shall constitute a
material breach of this Agreement and be deemed grounds for cancellation, termination or
suspension of the Agreement by CCDC, in whole or in part, and may result in ineligibility for
further work for CCDC.

14.    NONWAIVER: Failure of either party to exercise any of the rights under this Agreement,
or breach thereof, shall not be deemed to be a waiver of such right or a waiver of any
subsequent breach.

15.    SEVERABILITY: If any part of this Agreement is held unenforceable, the remaining
portions of the Agreement will nevertheless remain in full force and effect.

16.     ATTORNEY FEES: Should any litigation or arbitration be commenced between the
parties hereto concerning this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled, in addition to
any other relief as may be granted, to costs and reasonable attorneys' fees as determined by
arbitrator or court of competent jurisdiction. This provision shall be deemed to be a separate
contract between the parties and shall survive any default, termination, or forfeiture of this
Agreement.

17.   SUCCESSORS IN INTEREST: The provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon
and shall inure to the benefit of the parties hereby, and their respective successors and assigns.

18.     THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES: CCDC and CONTRACTOR are the only parties to
this Agreement. The parties do not intend that any non-party or third party will have any rights
whatsoever under this Agreement.

19.     NUMERATION: CCDC and CONTRACTOR acknowledge the Agreement may contain
gaps in the numbering of the provisions. Despite the gaps in the numbering, CCDC and
CONTRACTOR acknowledge the Agreement is the complete Agreement between them.

20.     SILENCE OF SPECIFICATION: The apparent silence of this specification and
supplemental specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from it of a detailed
description concerning any point shall be regarded as meaning that only best commercial
practice is to be used. Any exception to this specification shall be cause for rejection. CCDC
reserves the right to verify specification compliance and other information with published
sources as deemed necessary.

21.    ACCIDENT PREVENTION: The Contractor shall provide and maintain work
environments and procedures which will:


INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                        Page 21 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
       a)     Safeguard the public and Government personnel, property, materials, supplies,
              and equipment exposed to Contractor operations and activities.

       b)     Comply with all local, County, State, or other applicable legal requirements and
              will exercise all legally required safety precautions at all times.

       c)     Ensure that all Contractor employees who are performing Work in the streets
              wear an appropriate safety vest.

       d)     Avoid interruptions of Government operations and delays in project completion
              dates; and will exercise due care during the performance of work to protect from
              damage all existing facilities, structures, landscaping and utilities on local
              jurisdiction and private property.

       e)     For these purposes on contracts for construction or dismantling, demolition, or
              removal of improvements, the Contractor shall:
              i)     Provide appropriate safety barricades, signs, and signal lights;
              ii)    Ensure that any additional measures the CCDC determines to be
                     reasonably necessary for the purposes are taken.
              iii)   Take every reasonable effort to keep sidewalks, vehicle travel
                     lanes, driveways and crosswalks open at all times.
              v)     Report to CCDC immediately any Contractor caused damages.
              vi)    Effect the prompt repair any damage to any public property incurred while
                     installing the required items. Repairs to be completed as quickly as is
                     reasonably possible and as required by local ordinance.

22.    ALL ITEMS MUST BE NEW: All items to be furnished must be new and unused; all
goods shall be delivered and installed ready for use. The Contractor warrants that all equipment
furnished will be new equipment in good working order and will include at no additional charge
to CCDC any standard warranty normally furnished by the manufacturer with this equipment.




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                      Page 22 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
                                         PART 3


                          TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Technical specifications prepared by KPFF and dated 1/27/2011 follow this page.)




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT        Page 23 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011



SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section Includes:

           1.    Project information.
           2.    Work covered by Contract Documents.
           3.    Phased construction.
           4.    Access to site.
           5.    Coordination with occupants.
           6.    Work restrictions.
           7.    Specification and drawing conventions.
           8.    Miscellaneous provisions.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and
                 procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.


1.3        PROJECT INFORMATION

      A.   Project Identification: City Centre Stair Replacement Project.

           1.    Project Location: City Centre Garage, 312 S 9th St. Boise, ID.

      B.   Owner: Capital City Development Corporation (CCDC).

           1.    Owner's Representative: Max Clark.

      C.   Project Manager/ Engineer of Record: KPFF Consulting Engineers, Portland, OR.

           1.    Contact: Rob Van Dyke


1.4        WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (PROJECT SCOPE)

      A.   The Project Scope of Work is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:




SUMMARY                                                                                       011000 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


           1.    Removal of the existing steel stair systems on the northeast and northwest stair towers
                 and replacement with a precast stringer and intermediate landing system.

           2.    Selective demolition and replacement of the slab edge at the existing cast in place main
                 landings for the elevators and stairs. The Contractor shall remove all concrete until
                 sound concrete is encountered and there are no signs of reinforcement corrosion.

           3.    Removal and replacement of existing slab edge channel and guardrails.

           4.    Addition of topping slab at elevator thresholds and adjustment of elevator stop elevation
                 and thresholds to accommodate additional topping thickness.

      B.   Type of Contract:

           1.    Project will be constructed under a single prime contract with the entire responsibility for
                 completion of the project with the Contractor to whom the contract is awarded.

      C.   Base Bid and Bid Alternate

           1.    Section 017419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” includes a performance
                 requirement to “achieve end of Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by
                 weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work” (see Article
                 017419.1.4.A.) Section 017419 also states that the “Revenues, savings, rebates, tax
                 credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to
                 Contractor” (see Article 017419.3.3.B). The Base Bid shall include the anticipated cost
                 of meeting the salvage/recycling performance requirement and the anticipated revenue
                 received from salvage/recycling (see Bid Form in Part 1 of the Project Manual.)

           2.    The Bid Form includes a Bid Alternate which would allow for construction waste
                 management and disposal without the performance requirement for salvage/recycling
                 (see Bid Form in Part 1 of the Project Manual.)

           3.    The CCDC Board of Commissioners will determine at the time of the bid award whether
                 the Base Bid or Bid Alternate will be selected. If the Bid Alternate is selected, prior to
                 execution of the Contract, the Owner will amend the Contract Documents as appropriate
                 to address the removal of the recycling/salvage performance requirement.


1.5        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Days: Times expressed in days mean calendar days unless specifically stated as business days
           (Monday through Friday).

      B.   Substantial Completion: Point in execution of contract in which the Contractor believes scope
           of work is complete, and ready for inspection by Project Manager.




SUMMARY                                                                                           011000 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.6        SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE

      A.   The Contractor shall substantially complete the Work one-hundred, twenty (120) days from the
           date the contract is awarded. The Work shall be phased, with each phase taking approximately
           sixty (60) days, so one stair tower is fully functional at all times.


1.7        PHASED CONSTRUCTION

      A.   The Work shall be conducted in two phases, with each phase substantially complete as
           indicated:

           1.    Phase One: Northeast Stair tower. Work of this phase shall commence within fifteen
                 days after the Notice to Proceed and be substantially complete and ready for occupancy
                 within sixty days after commencement of construction of this phase.

           2.    Phase Two: Northwest Stair tower. The remaining Work shall be substantially complete
                 and ready for occupancy at time of Substantial Completion for the Work.

      B.   Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction
           schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates for all phases of the
           Work.


1.8        ACCESS TO SITE

      A.   Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated on drawings. Do not disturb
           portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated except as otherwise
           provided for storage areas in Article 011001.7D.

           1.    Limits: Confine construction operations to stairs and elevator towers.
           2.    Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways of the parking garage, loading
                 areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees,
                 the general public, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
                 parking or storage of materials.

                 a.     Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction
                        operations.
                 b.     Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
                        materials and equipment on-site.

      B.   Condition of Existing Building: Maintain elevator shafts of existing building affected by
           construction operations in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Protect the
           buildings which wrap the City Centre Garage from damage during construction, i.e. the Aspen
           Condominiums, Foster Building, and BoDo retail / office buildings. Repair damage caused by
           construction operations.

      C.   Stair and Elevator Closure: Provide signage, barricades, and lighting as required to indicate
           alternate exit path to be used during elevator or stair closure at each floor. Provide signage at
           garage entrance booth indicating closures. Comply with requirements of the Fire Marshall.




SUMMARY                                                                                          011000 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                            01/27/2011


      D.   Storage:
           1.    Storage outside the Work area may be permitted on the east end of the ground floor or
                 top deck of the Owner's facility with Owner's approval. Coordinate the creation of any
                 storage area with facility operator, Republic Parking Northwest; Contact: David Duke,
                 208-573-2256. Storage shall not interfere with Owner's operations.
           2.    Storage may be permitted in the Front Street right-of-way with Idaho Transportation
                 Department’s approval (for travel lane) and Ada County Highway District's approval (for
                 sidewalk). See Article 011001.10 for contact information.
           3.    Limits of storage area(s) shall be marked by fencing, barricades, or similar method.
                 Contractor accepts responsibility for the security of any materials or equipment kept in
                 storage area as part of contract terms.
           4.    The Contractor shall submit a storage loading plan for Owner's review, prior to storage of
                 any construction material.


1.9        COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

      A.   Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,
           with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction
           operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to
           interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

           1.    Main the vehicular entrances and exits to Front Street and to 9th Street at all times.

           2.    Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
                 facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
                 facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
           3.    Provide not less than seventy-two (72) hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect
                 Owner's operations.
           4.    Maintain access to one elevator and stair for egress at all times. Coordinate use and
                 control of elevators with facility operator, Republic Parking Northwest; Contact: David
                 Duke, 208-573-2256.


1.10       COORDINATION WITH AGENCIES AND OTHER ENTITIES

      A.   Work will require approvals, permits and construction coordination with various governing
           agencies and other entities including but not limited to the Idaho Transportation Department
           (ITD) and Ada County Highway Department (ACHD). Owner has conducted preliminary
           discussions with ITD and ACHD regarding lane closures, lane restrictions, use of road right-of-
           way, right-of-way permits, hoisting over the road right-of-way and traffic control for the Work
           (i.e. City Centre Stair Replacement Project).

      B.   For ITD and ACHD, Bidders are advised to consult with the following contact people in
           obtaining information for preparation of Bids. Owner is identifying these contact people in an
           effort to provide consistent information on these issues from these agencies to all prospective
           bidders.

           1.    Idaho Transportation Department
                 Pam Golden, P.E.
                 Development & Access Management Engineer – District 3



SUMMARY                                                                                             011000 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11            City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


                8150 Chinden Blvd
                Garden City, ID 83707
                (208) 334-8377 Office
                (208) 334-8917 FAX
                Pam.golden@itd.idaho.gov

        2.      Ada County Highway District (9th Street frontage)
                Larry Zurek
                ACHD Permit Coordinator
                3775 Adams Street
                Garden City, ID 83714
                (208) 387-6100 (Front Desk)
                (208) 387-6308 (Direct)
                lzurek@achdidaho.org

   C.        The Work will require coordination, approvals and/or permits from governing agencies and
             entities other than ITD and ACHD. Bidders have responsibility for identifying and
             consulting with these other governing agencies and entities in preparing Bids.


1.11    WORK RESTRICTIONS

  A.    Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

        1.      Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
                authorities having jurisdiction.

  B.    On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours,
        nights, and weekends, as allowed by the governing jurisdiction.

  C.    Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
        others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
        utility services according to requirements indicated:

        1.      Notify Project Manager and Owner not less than two business days in advance of
                proposed utility interruptions.
        2.      Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

  D.    Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
        vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

        1.      Notify Project Manager and Owner not less than two business days in advance of
                proposed disruptive operations.
        2.      Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

  E.    Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
        entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

  F.    Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
        is not permitted.




SUMMARY                                                                                        011000 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


  G.    Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on
        Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

  H.    Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening
        of Contractor personnel working on Project site.

        1.    Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.


1.12    SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

  A.    Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
        the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
        These conventions are as follows:

        1.    Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
              words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
              where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
        2.    Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
              otherwise.

  B.    Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
        of all Sections in the Specifications.

  C.    Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
        described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
        identify materials and products:

        1.    Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
              the individual Specifications Sections.
        2.    Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on
              Drawings.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


END OF SECTION 011000




SUMMARY                                                                                     011000 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011



SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 016000 – “Product Requirements” for specific requirements for
                 submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
           2.    Division 03 Section 030130 - "Maintenance of Cast-In-Place Concrete".
           3.    Division 03 Section 033000 - "Cast-In-Place Concrete".
           4.    Division 03 Section 034500 - "Precast Architectural Concrete".
           5.    Division 09 Section 099600 - "High Performance Coatings".
           6.    Division 07 Section 071800 – “Traffic Coatings”.
           7.    Division 07 Section 079200 – “Joint Sealants”.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
           those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

           1.    Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
                 changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
                 unavailability of required warranty terms.
           2.    Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
                 required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
                 Contractor or Owner.


1.4        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
           or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
           title and Drawing numbers and titles.

           1.    Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at the end of this section.
           2.    Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
                 as applicable:



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES                                                                       012500 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


              a.    Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
                    provided, if applicable.
              b.    Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
                    parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
                    contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
              c.    Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
                    the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
                    Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
                    durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
                    features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
                    specified.
              d.    Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
                    installation procedures.
              e.    Samples, where applicable or requested.
              f.    Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
              g.    List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
                    addresses and names and addresses of Project Managers and owners.
              h.    Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
                    results for compliance with requirements indicated.
              i.    Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
                    from ICC-ES.
              j.    Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
                    substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
                    Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
                    within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
                    letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
                    in delivery.
              k.    Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
              l.    Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
                    the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
                    with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
              m.    Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
                    become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
                    results.

        3.    Project Manager's Action: If necessary, Project Manager will request additional
              information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
              substitution. Project Manager will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of
              proposed substitution within seven days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of
              additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

              a.    Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Project
                    Manager's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
              b.    Use product specified if Project Manager does not issue a decision on use of a
                    proposed substitution within time allocated.




SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES                                                                        012500 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Compatibility of Substitutions:      Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
           substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
           compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.


1.6        PROCEDURES

      A.   Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
           substitutions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        SUBSTITUTIONS

      A.   Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
           change, but not later than seven days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
           submittals.

           1.    Conditions: Project Manager will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
                 listed in a. through h. below are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
                 Project Manager will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
                 these requirements.

                 a.     Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
                        indicated results.
                 b.     Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
                 c.     Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
                 d.     Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
                        jurisdiction.
                 e.     Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
                 f.     Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
                 g.     Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
                 h.     If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
                        has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
                        compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

      B.   Substitutions for Convenience: Project Manager will consider requests for substitution if
           received within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be
           considered or rejected at discretion of Project Manager.

           1.    Conditions: Project Manager will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
                 following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Project
                 Manager will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
                 requirements:

                 a.     Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
                        conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES                                                                           012500 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


                   Owner must assume.             Owner's additional responsibilities may include
                   compensation to Project Manager for redesign and evaluation services, increased
                   cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
              b.   Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
                   Documents.
              c.   Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
                   indicated results.
              d.   Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
              e.   Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
              f.   Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
                   jurisdiction.
              g.   Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
              h.   Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
              i.   Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
              j.   If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
                   has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
                   compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


END OF SECTION 012500




SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES                                                                     012500 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11                      City Centre Stair Replacement Project                                      01/27/2011


REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM:

TO: ___________________________________________ DATE: _______________________________

PROJECT NAME: __________________________ ADDRESS: ________________________________

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project:

SECTION                                 PARAGRAPH                                SPECIFIED ITEM

____________________                    ____________________                     _____________________

Proposed Substitution: __________________________________________________________________

Reason for Substitution: _________________________________________________________________

Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications, which proposed substitution would require for its
proper installation. Also, include complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable.

Fill in Blanks Below:

A.   Will the undersigned contractor pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by
     the requested substitution?
     _________________________________________________________________________________

B.   What effect does substitution have on other trades?

C.   Differences between proposed substitution and specified item?

D.   Difference in product cost or product delivery time?

E.   Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified item?


The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item.

Submitted By _______________________________

Firm _____________________________

Address ____________________________ By _________________

___________________________________ Date ________________

Date _______________________________ Remarks_____________

Telephone _______________________________________________

For Use by Design Consultant:

□    Recommended              □    Recommended at noted                By: _______________________

□    Not recommended          □    Received too late                   Date: ______________________

For Use by Owner:

     __________ Approved                __________ Rejected

Project Manager _____________________________________ Date ____________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011



SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
           Contract modifications.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for
                 handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.


1.3        MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

           Project Manager will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work,
           not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Field Order Form.


1.4        WORK CHANGE REQUESTS

      A.   Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Project Manager will issue a detailed description of
           proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract
           Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and
           Specifications.

           1.    Owner Proposal Requests issued by Project Manager are not instructions either to stop
                 work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
           2.    Within seven days after receipt of Owner Proposal Request, submit a quotation
                 estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to
                 execute the change (Work Change Proposal).

                 a.    Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
                       total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
                       to substantiate quantities.
                 b.    Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
                       discounts.
                 c.    Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
                 d.    Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
                       the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES                                                                012600 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


                       finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
                       an extension of the Contract Time.

      B.   Contractor-Initiated Work Change Requests: If latent or changed conditions require
           modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a Change Request by submitting Change
           Request to Project Manager.

           1.    Include a statement outlining reasons for the Change Request and the effect of the
                 Change Request on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change.
                 Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
           2.    Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
                 amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
                 substantiate quantities.
           3.    Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
                 discounts.
           4.    Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
           5.    Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
                 change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
                 and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
                 Contract Time.
           6.    Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section 12500 "Substitution Procedures" if the
                 proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system
                 specified.
           7.    Work Change Request Form: Use form acceptable to Project Manager.


1.5        CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

      A.   Work Change Directive: Project Manager may issue a Work Change Directive on form
           included at the end of this section. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with
           a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

           1.    Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
                 designates method to be followed to determine any change in the Contract Sum or the
                 Contract Time.

      B.   Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
           Work Change Directive.

           1.    After completion of change, submit to the Project Manager an itemized account and
                 supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.


1.6        CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

      A.   On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal prepared by Contractor for Owner, or
           approval of a Contractor Work Change Request, and issuance of a Construction Change
           Directive, Project Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor
           on AIA Document G701.




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES                                                                  012600 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11      City Centre Stair Replacement Project   01/27/2011


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


END OF SECTION 012600




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES                                  012600 - 3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11                               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                                                       01/27/2011

                                                 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE
                                                                                                                       No. __________________


DATE OF ISSUANCE _________________                                                         EFFECTIVE DATE ___________________


OWNER
CONTRACTOR
Contract:
Project:
OWNER's Contract No. ___________________                                                ENGINEER's Project No. _________________


You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):
Description:



Purpose of Work Change Directive:


Attachments: (List documents supporting change)



If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price any Claim for a
Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods as defined in the
Contract Documents.

Method of determining change in
Contract Price:

 Unit Prices
 Lump Sum
 Cost of the Work______________________
Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price:  Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract
$_____________________________________.           Times:
If the change involves an increase, the estimated Substantial Completion: ______ days;
amount is not to be exceeded without further      Ready for final payment: ______ days.
authorization.
____________________________________________________________________________________
RECOMMENDED:                                      AUTHORIZED:

_______________________________________                                               _______________________________________
      ENGINEER                                                                              OWNER
By: ___________________________________                                               By: ___________________________________
EJCDC No. 1910-8-F (1996 Edition)
Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specifications
Institute.
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011

WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE

INSTRUCTIONS


A. GENERAL INFORMATION

This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work which, if not processed
expeditiously, might delay the Project. These changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the
Contract Price or the Contract Times. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with
Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order.

For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or the
Contract Times a Field Order should be used.

B. COMPLETING THE WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE FORM

Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the items involved and attachments.

Based on conversations between Engineer and Contractor, Engineer completes the following:

        METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to
        be used in determining the final cost of Work involved and the estimated net effect on the Contract
        Price. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is
        approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive
        must be issued to change the estimated price or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the
        estimated time is reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price,
        the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked "Not Applicable".

Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner for authorization
because Engineer alone does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or Times. Once authorized by
Owner, a copy should be sent by Engineer to Contractor. Price and Times may only be changed by Change
Order signed by Owner and Contractor with Engineer's recommendation.

Paragraph 10.03.A.2 of the General Conditions requires that a Change Order be initiated and processed to
cover any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed pursuant to this Work Change
Directive.

Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and times are determined, Contractor
should submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order.

THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT
PRICE OR CONTRACT TIMES. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED
PROMPTLY.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                      01/27/2011



SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
           Applications for Payment.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative
                 procedures for handling changes to the Contract.
           2.    Division 01 Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
                 requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction
                 schedule.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
           Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
           Applications for Payment.


1.4        SCHEDULE OF VALUES

      A.   Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
           construction schedule.

           1.    Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
                 and schedules, including the following:

                 a.    Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
                 b.    Submittal schedule.
                 c.    Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
                       schedule.

           2.    Submit the schedule of values to Project Manager at earliest possible date, but no later
                 than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for
                 Payment.




PAYMENT PROCEDURES                                                                             012900 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


           3.    Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
                 separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each
                 phase of payment.
           4.    Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction
                 schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values
                 coordinated with each element.

      B.   Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
           the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

           1.    Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

                 a.    Project name and location.
                 b.    Name of Project Manager.
                 c.    Project Manager's project number.
                 d.    Contractor's name and address.
                 e.    Date of submittal.

           2.    Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Documents G702 and G703.
           3.    Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
                 evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
                 Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts
                 in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
           4.    Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
           5.    Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
                 Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
                 and stored, but not yet installed.

                 a.    Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,
                       include evidence of insurance.

           6.    Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
                 subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
           7.    Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
                 Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

                 a.    Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
                       work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
                       or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

           8.    Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
                 Application for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
                 in a change in the Contract Sum.


1.5        APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

      A.   Monthly Applications for Payment: Application for Payment following the initial Application
           for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Project
           Manager and paid for by Owner.




PAYMENT PROCEDURES                                                                                 012900 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


        1.    Project Manager shall have five business days to review and accept or to return monthly
              Applications for Payment for corrections to Contractor. Contractor shall have five
              business days to resubmit the first Application for Payment if corrections are requested
              by Project Manager. Upon acceptance of the first Application of Payment, Project
              Manager shall forward the first Application of Payment to Owner.
        2.    Owner shall have thirty days in which to review and approve first Application for
              Payment and pay Contractor.
        3.    Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
              Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements as
              described in Sections H., I., and J. below.

  B.    Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
        between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
        for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

  C.    Payment Application Times: The period covered by each Application for Payment is one
        month, ending on the last day of the month. Submit the Application for Payment on the first
        business day following the last day of the month. Applications received after the first business
        day following the last day of the month shall be reviewed the following month, without
        exception.

  D.    Application for Payment Forms: Use Application for Payment form provided at the end of this
        section. This for Applications for Payment includes of schedule of values.

  E.    Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
        authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Project Manager will return
        incomplete applications without action.

        1.    Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
              Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
        2.    Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
              day of construction period covered by application.

  F.    Transmittal: Submit one signed and notarized original copy of each Application for Payment to
        Project Manager by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Include waivers of lien and
        similar attachments if required.

        1.    Transmit copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
              information about application.

  G.    Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
        lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
        related to the Work covered by the payment.

        1.    Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
              deduction for retainage, on each item.
        2.    When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
              waivers.
        3.    Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
              waivers.
        4.    Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.



PAYMENT PROCEDURES                                                                           012900 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


  H.    Initial Application for Payment:

        1.    Contractor shall complete the following administrative actions and submittals prior or
              concurrent with submittal of first Application for Payment:

              a.     List of subcontractors.
              b.     Schedule of values.
              c.     Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
              d.     List of Contractor's staff assignments.
              e.     List of Contractor's principal consultants.
              f.     Certificates of insurance and insurance policies meeting Contract requirements
                     (prior to execution of the Contract by Owner)
              g.     Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Payment Bond meeting Contract
                     requirements (prior to execution of the Contract by Owner)

        2.    Project Manager shall have five business days to review and accept or to return the first
              Application for Payment for corrections to Contractor. Contractor shall have five
              business days to resubmit the first Application for Payment if corrections are requested
              by Project Manager. Upon acceptance of the first Application of Payment, Project
              Manager shall forward the first Application of Payment to Owner.
        3.    Owner shall have thirty days in which to review and approve first Application for
              Payment and pay Contractor.


  I.    Application for Payment at Substantial Completion:

        1.    After Project Manager issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall
              submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the
              Work claimed as substantially complete.

              a.     Contractor shall include documentation supporting claim that the Work is
                     substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the
                     Contract Sum.
              b.     This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued
                     previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
              c.     Owner will hold 5% retainer until project closeout.

        2.    Project Manager shall have five business days to review and accept or to return the
              Application for Payment at substantial completion for corrections to Contractor.
              Contractor shall have five business days to resubmit the Application for Payment if
              corrections are requested by Project Manager. Upon acceptance of the Application of
              Payment, Project Manager shall forward the Application of Payment to Owner.
        3.    Owner shall have thirty days in which to review and approve Application for Payment at
              substantial completion and pay Contractor.


  J.    Final Payment Application:

        1.    After completing Project closeout requirements, Contractor shall submit final Application
              for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and
              accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:


PAYMENT PROCEDURES                                                                          012900 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011



              a.    Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
              b.    Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
                    proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
              c.    Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
              d.    AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
              e.    AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

        2.    Project Manager shall have five business days to review and accept or to return the final
              Application for Payment for corrections to Contractor. Contractor shall have five
              business days to resubmit the final Application for Payment if corrections are requested
              by Project Manager. Upon acceptance of the final Application of Payment, Project
              Manager shall forward the final Application of Payment to Owner.
        3.    Owner shall have thirty days in which to review and approve final Application for
              Payment and pay Contractor.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


END OF SECTION 012900




PAYMENT PROCEDURES                                                                          012900 - 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11                               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                                                      01/27/2011

                                     APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. ________
To:                                                                                                                                        (OWNER)
From:                                                                                                                                 (CONTRACTOR)
Contract:
Project:
OWNER's Contract No.                  .                                                                                     ENGINEER's Project No.
For Work accomplished through the date of:                                         .

1.          Original Contract Price:                                                                                      $_____________________
2.          Net change by Change Orders and Written Amendments (+ or -):                                                  $_____________________
3.          Current Contract Price (1 plus 2):                                                                            $_____________________
4.          Total completed and stored to date:                                                                           $_____________________
5.          Retainage (per Agreement):
                        _____% of completed Work:                        $____________________
                        _____% of stored material:                       $____________________
                                    Total Retainage:                                                                      $_____________________
6.          Total completed and stored to date less retainage (4 minus 5):                                                $_____________________
7.          Less previous Application for Payments:                                                                       $_____________________
8.          DUE THIS APPLICATION (6 MINUS 7):                                                                             $_____________________
Accompanying Documentation:


CONTRACTOR'S Certification:

The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (1) all previous progress payments received from OWNER on
account of Work done under the Contract referred to above have been applied on account to discharge
CONTRACTOR’s legitimate obligations incurred in connection with Work covered by prior Applications for
Payment numbered 1 through _____ inclusive; (2) title of all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said
Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free
and clear of all Liens, security interests and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a Bond acceptable to
OWNER indemnifying OWNER against any such Lien, security interest or encumbrance); and (3) all Work covered
by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and not defective.

Dated ____________________________
                                                                                                                                             CONTRACTOR

                                                                                                                                                           By:
State of ______________________________
County of ____________________________
Subscribed and sworn to before me this _____
day of __________________, ________

____________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission expires: _____________________

Payment of the above AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION is recommended.

Dated ___________________________
                                                                                                                                                  ENGINEER

                                                                                                                                                           By:
EJCDC No. 1910-8-E (1996 Edition)
Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specification
Institute.
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

INSTRUCTIONS
______________________________________________________________________________

A. GENERAL INFORMATION

The sample form of Schedule of Values is intended as a guide only. Many projects require a more
extensive form with space for numerous items, descriptions of Change Orders, identification of variable
quantity adjustments, summary of materials and equipment stored at the site and other information. It is
expected that a separate form will be developed by Engineer and Contractor at the time Contractor's
Schedule of Values is finalized. Note also that the format for retainage must be changed if the Contract
permits (or the law provides), and Contractor elects to deposit securities in lieu of retainage. Refer to
Article 14 of the General Conditions for provisions concerning payments to Contractor.

B. COMPLETING THE FORM

The Schedule of Values, submitted and approved as provided in paragraphs 2.05.B.3 and 2.07 of the
General Conditions, should be reproduced as appropriate in the space indicated on the Application for
Payment form. Note that the cost of materials and equipment is often listed separately from the cost of
installation. Also, note that each Unit Price is deemed to include Contractor's overhead and profit.

All Change Orders affecting the Contract Price should be identified and included in the Schedule of
Values as required for progress payments.

The form is suitable for use in the Final Application for Payment as well as for Progress Payments;
however, the required accompanying documentation is usually more extensive for final payment. All
accompanying documentation should be identified in the space provided on the form.

C. LEGAL REVIEW

All accompanying documentation of a legal nature, such as Lien waivers, should be reviewed by an
attorney, and Engineer should so advise Owner.
      KPFF Job # 208586.11                 City Centre Stair Replacement Project                 01/27/2011

                                                                                                        Application No._____ Date:_____________________
                  ITEM                        UNIT        ESTIMATED            SCHEDULE     QUANTITY    AMOUNT            MATERIAL        AMOUNT
                                              PRICE       QUANTITY             OF VALUES   COMPLETED                 %     STORED       COMPLETED
                                                                                AMOUNT                                                  AND STORED
 1.                                           $                               $                         $                 $             $
 2.
 3.
 4.
 5.
 6.
 7.
 8.
 9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
                 TOTAL                                                        $                         $                 $             $
      Note: Total Schedule of Values Amount should equal the current Contract Price.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011



SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
           including, but not limited to, the following:

           1.    General Coordination Procedures
           2.    Coordination Drawings.
           3.    Requests for Information (RFIs).
           4.    Project meetings.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 013200" Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and
                 submitting Contractor's construction schedule.
           2.    Division 01 Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general
                 installation.
           3.    Division 01 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the
                 Contract.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   RFI: Request from Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract
           Documents.


1.4        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
           portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
           special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

           1.    Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
                 products.
           2.    Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
           3.    Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

      B.   Key Personnel Names: Within fourteen (14) days of Contract award and prior to starting
           construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                           013100 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


           and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and
           responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular
           telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
           individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

           1.    Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office and by each
                 temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.


1.5        GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

      A.   Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
           Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
           construction operations included in different Sections of Specifications that depend on each
           other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

           1.    Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
                 installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
                 or after its own installation.
           2.    Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
                 accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
           3.    Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

      B.   Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
           required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
           at meetings.

           1.    Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
                 Work is required.


1.6        COORDINATION DRAWINGS

      A.   Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
           individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
           Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
           required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
           one entity.

           1.    Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
                 indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
                 data. Include the following information, as applicable:

                 a.     Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.
                        Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
                        various systems and components.
                 b.     Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
                        structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
                 c.     Indicate required installation sequences.
                 d.     Indicate as built dimensions of the existing structure on the Drawings. Specifically
                        note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with related work and minimum



PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                              013100 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


                       clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Project Manager indicating
                       proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult
                       installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

      B.   Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

           1.    Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
           2.    Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
                 embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
                 floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
                 similar items.
           3.    Electrical Work: Show the following:

                 a.    Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
                 b.    Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-
                       alarm locations.
                 c.    Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

           4.    Review: Project Manager will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is
                 being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
                 responsibility. If Project Manager determines that coordination drawings are not being
                 prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Project Manager will so
                 inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
           5.    Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to
                 requirements in Division 01 Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

      C.   Coordination Digital Data Files:    Prepare coordination digital data files according to the
           following requirements:

           1.    File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating
                 system as original Drawings.
           2.    File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data
                 File (PDF) format.
           3.    Project Manager will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use
                 in preparing coordination digital data files.

                 a.    Project Manager makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of
                       digital data files as they relate to Drawings.
                 b.    Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Autocad 2009.
                 c.    Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement
                       included in this Project Manual.


1.7        REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

      A.   General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
           the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI to the Project Manager in
           the form provided at the end of this Section. All RFIs shall be submitted by the Contractor.

           1.    Project Manager will return RFIs submitted to Project Manager by any other entity
                 whether controlled by Contractor or otherwise with no response.



PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                              013100 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


        2.    Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
              work or work of subcontractors.

  B.    Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
        interpretation and the following:

        1.    Project name.
        2.    Project number.
        3.    Date.
        4.    Name of Contractor.
        5.    Name of Project Manager.
        6.    RFI number, numbered sequentially.
        7.    RFI subject.
        8.    Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
        9.    Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
        10.   Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
        11.   Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
              Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
        12.   Contractor's signature.
        13.   Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
              Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
              needing interpretation.
        14.   Potential costs or savings.

  C.    RFI Forms: Form provided at the end of this Section.

        1.    Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

  D.    Project Manager’s Action: Project Manager will review each RFI, determine action required,
        and respond. Allow seven days for Project Manager's response for each RFI. RFIs received by
        Project Manager after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

        1.    The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

              a.    Requests for approval of submittals (see Section 013300).
              b.    Requests for approval of substitutions (see Section 012500).
              c.    Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
              d.    Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
                    Documents.
              e.    Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum (see Section
                    012600).
              f.    Requests for interpretation of Project Manager's actions on submittals.
              g.    Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

        2.    Project Manager’s action may include a request for additional information, in which case
              Project Manager's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
              information.
        3.    Project Manager’s action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
              Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Work Change Request according
              to Division 01 Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                        013100 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


                 a.    If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
                       the Contract Sum, notify Project Manager in writing within seven days of receipt
                       of the RFI response.

      E.   RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number
           Submit log weekly. Include the following:

           1.    Project name.
           2.    Name and address of Contractor.
           3.    Name and address of Project Manager.
           4.    RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
           5.    RFI description.
           6.    Date the RFI was submitted.
           7.    Date Project Manager's response was received.

      F.   On receipt of Project Manager action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI
           response to affected parties. Review response and notify Project Manager within seven days if
           Contractor disagrees with response.

           1.    Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
                 appropriate.


1.8        PROJECT MEETINGS

      A.   General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
           indicated.

           1.    Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
                 required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Project Manager of
                 scheduled meeting dates and times.
           2.    Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
           3.    Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
                 and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
                 including Owner and Project Manager, within three days of the meeting.

      B.   Preconstruction Conference: Owner shall schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference at
           a time convenient to Contractor and Project Manager, but no later than fourteen days after
           execution of the Agreement and prior to start of construction.

           1.    Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
           2.    Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Project Manager, Contractor and its
                 superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend
                 the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
                 authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
           3.    Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
                 following:

                 a.    Tentative construction schedule.
                 b.    Phasing.
                 c.    Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.



PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                            013100 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


              d.    Designation of key personnel and their duties.
              e.    Lines of communications.
              f.    Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
              g.    Procedures for RFIs.
              h.    Procedures for testing and inspecting.
              i.    Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
              j.    Distribution of the Contract Documents.
              k.    Submittal procedures.
              l.    Preparation of record documents.
              m.    Use of the premises and existing building.
              n.    Work restrictions.
              o.    Working hours.
              p.    Owner's occupancy requirements.
              q.    Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
              r.    Procedures for moisture and mold control.
              s.    Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
              t.    Construction waste management and recycling.
              u.    Parking availability.
              v.    Office, work, and storage areas.
              w.    Equipment deliveries and priorities.
              x.    First aid.
              y.    Security.
              z.    Progress cleaning.
              aa.   Special traffic and events.

        4.    Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
              minutes.

  C.    Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
        construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

        1.    Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
              affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
              installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Project
              Manager of scheduled meeting dates.
        2.    Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
              particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

              a.    Contract Documents.
              b.    Options.
              c.    Related RFIs.
              d.    Related Change Orders.
              e.    Purchases.
              f.    Deliveries.
              g.    Submittals.
              h.    Review of mockups.
              i.    Possible conflicts.
              j.    Compatibility requirements.
              k.    Time schedules.
              l.    Weather limitations.
              m.    Manufacturer's written instructions.


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                         013100 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


              n.    Warranty requirements.
              o.    Compatibility of materials.
              p.    Acceptability of substrates.
              q.    Temporary facilities and controls.
              r.    Space and access limitations.
              s.    Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
              t.    Testing and inspecting requirements.
              u.    Installation procedures.
              v.    Coordination with other work.
              w.    Required performance results.
              x.    Protection of adjacent work.
              y.    Protection of construction and personnel.

        3.    Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
              required corrective measures and actions.
        4.    Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
              requiring information.
        5.    Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
              Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
              Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

  D.    Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

        1.    Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
        2.    Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Project Manager, Contractor,
              subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
              planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
              meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
              conclude matters relating to the Work.
        3.    Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
              other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
              appropriate to status of Project.

              a.    Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
                    Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
                    in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
                    behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
                    do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
                    subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

                    1)     Review schedule for next period.

              b.    Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

                    1)     Interface requirements.
                    2)     Sequence of operations.
                    3)     Resolution of BIM component conflicts.
                    4)     Status of submittals.
                    5)     Deliveries.
                    6)     Off-site fabrication.
                    7)     Access.


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                          013100 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


                    8)     Site utilization.
                    9)     Temporary facilities and controls.
                    10)    Progress cleaning.
                    11)    Quality and work standards.
                    12)    Status of correction of deficient items.
                    13)    Field observations.
                    14)    Status of RFIs.
                    15)    Status of proposal requests.
                    16)    Pending changes.
                    17)    Status of Change Orders.
                    18)    Pending claims and disputes.
                    19)    Documentation of information for payment requests.

        4.    Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
              meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.


              a.    Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
                    meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
                    revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

  E.    Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
        convenient to Owner and Project Manager, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date
        of Substantial Completion.

        1.    Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
              closeout.
        2.    Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Project Manager, Contractor and its
              superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend
              the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
              conclude matters relating to the Work.
        3.    Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
              including the following:

              a.    Preparation of record documents.
              b.    Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
                    inspection for acceptance.
              c.    Submittal of written warranties.
              d.    Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
              e.    Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
              f.    Requirements for demonstration and training.
              g.    Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
              h.    Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
                    for final payment.
              i.    Submittal procedures.
              j.    Coordination of separate contracts.
              k.    Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
              l.    Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.
              m.    Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

        4.    Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                                                         013100 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11      City Centre Stair Replacement Project   01/27/2011




PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


END OF SECTION 013100




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION                               013100 - 9
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11            City Centre Stair Replacement Project                      01/27/2011



                                REQUEST FOR INFORMATION


PROJECT: City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          RFI#: ___________________

ITEM: __________________________________________________________________________

REF. DWG. OR SPEC.: ____________________________________________________________

SCHEDULE IMPACT?          YES        NO                COST IMPACT? YES              NO

REQUEST RETURN BY: ___________________________

DESCRIPTION/REQUEST:
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________

ORIGINATOR: _______________            FIRM: ___________________           DATE: ______________


                                            RESPONSE

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________

BY: _____________________          FIRM: ______________________           DATE: _______________

This is not an authorization to proceed with work involving additional costs and/or time. Notification
must be given in accordance with the Contract Documents if any response causes any changes to the
Contract Documents.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job 208586.11                 City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011



SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
           construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

           1.    Startup construction schedule.
           2.    Construction schedule updating reports
           3.    Contractor's construction schedule.
           4.    Daily construction reports.
           5.    Site condition reports.
           6.    Special reports.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests
                 and inspections.
           2.    Division 01 Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
           and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
           time and resources.

           1.    Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
                 early start and finish times.
           2.    Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
           3.    Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

      B.   Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as
           scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless
           otherwise approved by Project Manager.

      C.   CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
           project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
           determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                                013200 - 1
KPFF Job 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


      D.   Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
           schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

      E.   Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

      F.   Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

           1.    Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
                 jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
                 schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
           2.    Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
                 early start of the successor activity.
           3.    Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
                 adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

      G.   Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
           an activity as scheduled.


1.4        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

           1.    Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
           2.    PDF electronic file.

      B.   Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

      C.   Startup construction schedule: Submit a cost-loaded, startup construction schedule at the
           preconstruction conference. Submittal of a cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not
           constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

      D.   Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
           period. Show logic ties for activities.

      E.   Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
           for entire construction period. After receipt of Contractor’s initial schedule, Project Manager
           may approve the format or may request reasonable modifications to the format. Contractor
           shall revise the Construction Schedule format consistent with Project Manager’s requested
           modifications and provide a revised Construction Schedule to Project Manager. Contractor
           shall update the Construction Schedule on a periodic basis to assure it is a fair representation of
           actual and projected construction progress, and whenever there is a change in the Construction
           Schedule due approval of a Construction Change Directive or Change Order.

           1.     Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
                 comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)
                 and date on label.

      F.   CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format
           for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                                013200 - 2
KPFF Job 208586.11                 City Centre Stair Replacement Project                            01/27/2011


           loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
           late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

           1.    Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
                 or actual start date if known.
           2.    Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
                 ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
           3.    Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
           4.    Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed
                 until most recent Application for Payment.

      G.   Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

      H.   Weekly Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

      I.   Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

      J.   Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

      K.   Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and
           reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Project
           Manager's request.

      B.   Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
           Division 01 Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and
           procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction
           schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

           1.    Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
           2.    Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
           3.    Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, and partial Owner
                 occupancy.
           4.    Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
           5.    Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
           6.    Review submittal requirements and procedures.
           7.    Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
           8.    Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
                 agencies.
           9.    Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.
           10.   Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
           11.   Review procedures for updating schedule.




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                                 013200 - 3
KPFF Job 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.6        COORDINATION

      A.   Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
           construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

      B.   Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,
           progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

           1.    Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
                 involved.
           2.    Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
                 them in proper sequence.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

      A.   Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final
           completion.

           1.    Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
                 early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

      B.   Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
           element of the Work. Comply with the following:

           1.    Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than three days, unless
                 specifically allowed by Project Manager.
           2.    Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
                 lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities
                 in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
                 approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

                 a.    Precast stair elements

           3.    Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
                 Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
                 in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
           4.    Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
                 Substantial Completion, and allow time for Project Manager’s administrative procedures
                 necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
           5.    Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than three business days for
                 completion of punch list items and final completion.

      C.   Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
           as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.


           1.    Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.



CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                             013200 - 4
KPFF Job 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


        2.    Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
              delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates
              indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

        3.    Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

              a.     Coordination with existing construction.
              b.     Limitations of continued occupancies.
              c.     Uninterruptible services.
              d.     Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
              e.     Use of premises restrictions.
              f.     Seasonal variations.
              g.     Environmental control.

        4.    Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
              Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

              a.     Subcontract awards.
              b.     Submittals.
              c.     Purchases.
              d.     Mockups.
              e.     Fabrication.
              f.     Sample testing.
              g.     Deliveries.
              h.     Installation.
              i.     Tests and inspections.
              j.     Adjusting.
              k.     Curing.

        5.    Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
              the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
              sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

              a.     Structural completion.
              b.     Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
              c.     Permanent space enclosure.
              d.     Completion of mechanical installation.
              e.     Completion of electrical installation.
              f.     Substantial Completion.

  D.    Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
        not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion and the
        following interim milestones:

        1.    Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
        2.    Completion of concrete slab repair on each level and each tower.
        3.    Completion of precast stair erection on each tower.

  E.    Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.
        On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and
        actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.



CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                         013200 - 5
KPFF Job 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


           1.    See Division 01 Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment
                 procedures.

      F.   Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
           commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

           1.    Unresolved issues.
           2.    Unanswered Requests for Information.
           3.    Rejected or unreturned submittals.
           4.    Notations on returned submittals.
           5.    Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

      G.   Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is seven or more calendar days
           behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
           which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working
           hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by
           which recovery will be accomplished.


2.2        STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

      A.   Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within
           fourteen days of date from when the Notice of Award is issued.

      B.   Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
           each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first
           thirty days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
           requirement prediction based on indicated activities.


2.3        CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

      A.   General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

      B.   Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within fourteen days of date from date when the
           Notice of Award is issued. Outline significant construction activities for the first ninety days of
           construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement
           prediction based on indicated activities.

      C.   CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network
           analysis diagram for the Work.

           1.    Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
                 accepted for use no later than fourteen days after date established for the Notice of
                 Award.

                 a.     Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall
                        not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion
                        dates, regardless of Project Manager's approval of the schedule.




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                                013200 - 6
KPFF Job 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


        2.    Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
              subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
              information.
        3.    Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
              progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
        4.    Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking
              days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract
              Time.

  D.    CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
        Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical
        paths.

        1.    Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
              of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
              following activities:

              a.     Preparation and processing of submittals.
              b.     Mobilization and demobilization.
              c.     Purchase of materials.
              d.     Delivery.
              e.     Fabrication.
              f.     Utility interruptions.
              g.     Installation.
              h.     Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
              i.     Testing.
              j.     Punch list and final completion.
              k.     Activities occurring following final completion.

        2.    Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
              completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract
              milestone dates.
        3.    Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
              network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
              to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
        4.    Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
              paths with most float near the edges.

              a.     Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
                     path.

        5.    Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on
              the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Project Manager's
              approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under
              main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance
              manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training
              (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.

              a.     Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Project
                     Manager.
              b.     Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                             013200 - 7
KPFF Job 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                             01/27/2011


      E.   Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
           submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
           of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

      F.   Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
           straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing
           the following:

           1.    Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
           2.    Description of activity.
           3.    Main events of activity.
           4.    Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
           5.    Early and late start dates.
           6.    Early and late finish dates.
           7.    Activity duration in workdays.
           8.    Total float or slack time.
           9.    Average size of workforce.
           10.   Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

      G.   Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
           showing the following:

           1.    Identification of activities that have changed.
           2.    Changes in early and late start dates.
           3.    Changes in early and late finish dates.
           4.    Changes in activity durations in workdays.
           5.    Changes in the critical path.
           6.    Changes in total float or slack time.
           7.    Changes in the Contract Time.

      H.   Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.

           1.    In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar
                 value.
           2.    In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative
                 dollar value.
           3.    In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as
                 of list date.
           4.    Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with
                 progress meetings.

                 a.     In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative
                        value completed" with total at bottom.
                 b.     Submit value summary printouts seven days before each regularly scheduled
                        progress meeting.


2.4        REPORTS

      A.   Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
           information concerning events at Project site:



CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                                 013200 - 8
KPFF Job 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


           1.    List of subcontractors at Project site.
           2.    List of separate contractors at Project site.
           3.    Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
           4.    Equipment at Project site.
           5.    Material deliveries.
           6.    High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
                 snow.
           7.    Accidents.
           8.    Meetings and significant decisions.
           9.    Unusual events (see special reports).
           10.   Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
           11.   Meter readings and similar recordings.
           12.   Emergency procedures.
           13.   Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
           14.   Change Orders received and implemented.
           15.   Work Change Directives received and implemented.
           16.   Services connected and disconnected.
           17.   Equipment or system tests and startups.
           18.   Partial completions and occupancies.
           19.   Substantial Completions authorized.

      B.   Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
           materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
           previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
           and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
           site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

           1.    Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.
           2.    Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.
           3.    Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

      C.   Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
           the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
           Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
           recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.


2.5        SPECIAL REPORTS

      A.   General: Submit special reports directly to Owner and Project Manager within one day of an
           occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

      B.   Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
           Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
           List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
           results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
           events are known or predictable.




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                             013200 - 9
KPFF Job 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

      A.   Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting
           using CPM scheduling.

           1.    In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor
                 employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques.
                 Submit qualifications.
           2.    Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress,
                 alleged delays, and time impact.

      B.   Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect
           actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
           scheduled progress meeting.

           1.    Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
                 been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
                 such meeting.
           2.    Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
                 limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
           3.    As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

      C.   Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Project Manager, Owner, testing and
           inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule
           responsibility.

           1.    Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
           2.    When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
                 same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
                 portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


END OF SECTION 013200




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION                                                             013200 - 10
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011



SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

       A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
          Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

       A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
          requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for
                 Payment and the schedule of values.
           2.    Division 01 Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting
                 schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
           3.    Division 01 Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record
                 Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

       A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Project
          Manager’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
          Specification Sections as "action submittals."

       B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
           require Project Manager’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying
           with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
           Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

       C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
          used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
          fixed-layout document format.


1.4        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
           required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
           fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
           corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Project Manager and additional time for handling
           and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                            013300 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


           1.    Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
                 Contractor's construction schedule.
           2.    Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
                 submittals required during the first 30 days of construction. List those submittals
                 required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of
                 long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
           3.    Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
                 construction schedule.

                 a.    Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
                       for submittals.

           4.    Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

                 a.    Scheduled date for first submittal.
                 b.    Specification Section number and title.
                 c.    Submittal category: Action; informational.
                 d.    Name of subcontractor.
                 e.    Description of the Work covered.
                 f.    Scheduled date for Project Manager’s final release or approval.
                 g.    Scheduled date of fabrication.
                 h.    Scheduled dates for purchasing.
                 i.    Scheduled dates for installation.
                 j.    Activity or event number.


1.5        SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

      A.   Engineer of Record's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings
           will be provided by Engineer of Record for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

           1.    Engineer of Record will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the
                 Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

                 a.    Engineer of Record makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of
                       digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
                 b.    Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in
                       Autocad 2009.
                 c.    Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
                       acceptable to Owner and Engineer of Record.
                 d.    The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:

                       1)     Floor plans.
                       2)     Details.

       B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
          construction activities.

           1.    Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
                 submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                           013300 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


        2.    Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
              Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
        3.    Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
              processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
              coordination.

              a.     Project Manager reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
                     coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

    C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
       Time for review shall commence on Project Manager’s receipt of submittal. No extension of
       the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
       advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

        1.    Initial Review: Allow ten days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
              time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required.
        2.    Resubmittal Review: Allow seven days for review of each resubmittal.


    D. Paper Submittals:     Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
       identification.

        1.    Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
        2.    Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
              Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Project Manager.
        3.    Provide three copies.
        4.    Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

              a.     Project name.
              b.     Date.
              c.     Name of Project Manager.
              d.     Name of Contractor.
              e.     Name of subcontractor.
              f.     Name of supplier.
              g.     Name of manufacturer.
              h.     Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

                     1)    Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
                           decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01).
                     2)    Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point
                           (e.g., 061000.01.A).

              i.     Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
              j.     Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
              k.     Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
              l.     Other necessary identification.

        5.    Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
              handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Project Manager will return
              without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                           013300 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


              a.     Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals:       Provide locations on form for the
                     following information:

                     1)    Project name.
                     2)    Date.
                     3)    Destination (To:).
                     4)    Source (From:).
                     5)    Name and address of Project Manager.
                     6)    Name of Contractor.
                     7)    Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
                     8)    Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
                     9)    Category and type of submittal.
                     10)   Submittal purpose and description.
                     11)   Specification Section number and title.
                     12)   Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
                           for each of multiple items.
                     13)   Transmittal number.
                     14)   Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
                     15)   Remarks.
                     16)   Signature of transmitter.
                     17)   Number of copies.

   E.   Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
         follows:

        1.    Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
              requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
              navigation to each item.
        2.    Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

              a.     File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed
                     by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
              b.     Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
                     LNHS-061000.01.A).

        3.    Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
              markings and action taken by Project Manager.
        4.    Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
              containing the following information:

              a.    Project name.
              a.    Date.
              c.    Name and address of Project Manager.
              d.    Name of Contractor.
              e.    Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
              f.    Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
              g.    Category and type of submittal.
              h.    Submittal purpose and description.
              i.    Specification Section number and title.
              j.    Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
                    of multiple items.


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                         013300 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


                 k.     Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
                 l.     Related physical samples submitted directly.
                 m.     Indication of full or partial submittal.
                 n.     Transmittal number.
                 o.     Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
                 p.     Other necessary identification.
                 q.     Remarks.

      F.   Options: Identify options requiring selection by Project Manager.

      G.   Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

           1.    Note date and content of previous submittal.
           2.    Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
                 revision.
           3.    Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Project
                 Manager’s action stamp.

      H.   Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
           fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance
           of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

      I.   Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
           action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Project Manager’s action stamp.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

       A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
          individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
          Sections.

           1.    Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

                 a.     Project Manager will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as
                        an electronic Project record document file.

           2.    Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
                 indicated. Project Manager will return two copies.
           3.    Informational Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
                 indicated. Project Manager will not return copies.
           4.    Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
                 entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
                 signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
                 entity.

                 a.     Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted
                        certificates and certifications where indicated.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                             013300 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                            01/27/2011


              b.     Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
                     where indicated.

    B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
       type of product or equipment.

        1.    If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
              are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
        2.    Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
        3.    Include the following information, as applicable:

              a.     Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
              b.     Manufacturer's product specifications.
              c.     Standard color charts.
              d.     Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
              e.     Testing by recognized testing agency.
              f.     Application of testing agency labels and seals.
              g.     Notation of coordination requirements.
              h.     Availability and delivery time information.

        4.    Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

  C.    Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
        Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

        1.    Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.         Include the
              following information, as applicable:

              a.     Identification of products.
              b.     Schedules.
              c.     Compliance with specified standards.
              d.     Notation of coordination requirements.
              e.     Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
              f.     Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
              g.     Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

        2.    Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
              Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
        3.    Submit Shop Drawings in one of the following formats:

              a.     PDF electronic file.
              b.     Three opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Project Manager will retain two
                     copies; remainder will be returned.

    D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
       characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
       submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

        1.    Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
              in one submittal package.
        2.    Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                            013300 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


              a.    Generic description of Sample.
              b.    Product name and name of manufacturer.
              c.    Sample source.
              d.    Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
              e.    Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

         3.   For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
              submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
              identification information for record.
         4.   Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
              control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
              used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

              a.    Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
                    Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
                    of use.

         5.   Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
              sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

              a.    Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
                    pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
                    manufacturer's product line. Project Manager will return submittal with options
                    selected.

         6.   Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
              from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
              physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
              color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
              following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
              containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
              color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
              and inspection.

              a.    Number of Samples: Submit one set of Samples. Project Manager will retain
                    Sample set.

                    1)     Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
                           techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
                           be demonstrated.
                    2)     If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
                           material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets of paired
                           units that show approximate limits of variations.

    E.   Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
         Section 13200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

    F.   Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
         Division 01 Section 12900 "Payment Procedures."




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                           013300 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


       G. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals:            Comply with requirements
          specified in Division 01 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

       H. Record Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
          017839 “Project Record Documents”.

  I.       Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
           of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
           information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

  J.       Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
           comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
           Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
           personnel certified.

  K.       Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
           Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
           authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

  L.       Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
           that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
           manufacturing experience where required.

  M.       Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
           material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

  N.       Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
           standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
           requirements in the Contract Documents.

  O.       Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
           product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

  P.       Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
           manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
           evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
           on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

  Q.       Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
           authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
           Include the following information:

           1.    Name of evaluation organization.
           2.    Date of evaluation.
           3.    Time period when report is in effect.
           4.    Product and manufacturers' names.
           5.    Description of product.
           6.    Test procedures and results.
           7.    Limitations of use.




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                            013300 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


      R.   Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
           agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
           of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

      S.   Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
           agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
           before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
           preparation needed for adhesion.

      T.   Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
           performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,
           for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

      U.   Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
           performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
           Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
           Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
           calculations. Include page numbers.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

       A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
          other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
          and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Project Manager.

       B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals:            See requirements in Division 01
          Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

       C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
          and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
          of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
          and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.


3.2        PROJECT MANAGER’S ACTION

       A. Action Submittals: Project Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
          corrections or revisions required, and return it. Project Manager will stamp each submittal with
          an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

       B. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
          submittals has received prior approval from Project Manager.

       C. Informational Submittals: Project Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or
           will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Project Manager will forward each
           submittal which complies with requirements to appropriate party.




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                               013300 - 9
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


    D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
        for resubmittal without review.

    E.   Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Project Manager
         without action.


END OF SECTION 013300




SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES                                                                     013300 - 10
                                      Electronic Media Agreement
Contractor and Subcontractor ("Recipient") have requested that the Engineer provide to it certain plans,
specifications, three dimensional models, and other documents in electronic form ("Electronic Form Documents"), for
the City Centre Stair Replacement Project, and the Engineer will do so. The Recipient recognizes that Electronic
Form Documents are not intended to be used for construction, are not Contract Documents under the terms of the
construction Contract, may be revised by others without the knowledge or consent of the Engineer, may not
accurately show dimensions and sizes and, when plotted, may result in variances or corrupt other files of the user.

The Recipient agrees that the Electronic Form Documents will be used for general reference only. The
Recipient also agrees not to use the Electronic Form Documents as shop drawings or submittals, or for any
project other than the Project for which they were prepared.

The Recipient acknowledges that the Electronic Form Documents are the property of the Engineer and subject to the
copyright of the Engineer. The Electronic Form Documents may be write-protected by the Engineer such that no data
on such disk can be manipulated. The Engineer will provide to the Recipient only a working copy of Electronic Form
Documents. Said working copy of the Electronic Form Documents shall have all indices of the Engineer's ownership,
professional name, and/or involvement in the Project removed from the electronic display.

Any use of any kind and/or changes to the Electronic Form Documents will be at the sole risk of the user, and without
liability, risk, or legal exposure to the Engineer. The Recipient and any other person or entity using the Electronic
Form Documents agrees to release and, to the fullest extent permitted by law, defend and indemnify the Engineer, its
consultants, and their partners, shareholders, agents, and employees from and against any and all claims, demands,
losses, expenses, damages, penalties, and liabilities of any kind, including without limitation, attorneys' fees arising
out of or relating in any way to any such use of or change to the Electronic Form Documents.

Under no circumstance shall the transfer of the Electronic Form Documents for use of the Recipient be deemed a
sale by the Engineer, and the Engineer makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, of merchantability and
fitness for any particular purpose.

The Recipient agrees, as a condition of forwarding the Electronic Form Documents to any other person or entity, to
require such third party to agree in writing to the terms and conditions of this Agreement concerning use of the
Electronic Form Documents.

Dated this _____ day of ___________, _______.

KPFF Consulting Engineers



Name (PM or PIC)                                                By                                            Date


Project Name

KPFF Project Number
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011



SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
           control.

      B.   Contractor shall conduct testing and inspecting services to verify compliance with requirements
           specified or indicated in 1. below. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
           compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

           1.    Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
                 are specified in the Sections that specify those activities (Sections 030130, 033000,
                 034500, 055000, 071800, 079200, and 099600). Requirements in these Sections may
                 also cover production of standard products.
           2.    Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
                 assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
                 requirements.
           3.    Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
                 by Project Manager, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
                 provisions of this Section.

      C.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 030130 – “Maintenance of Cast-In-Place Concrete” for specific requirements
                 and limitations regarding concrete repair.
           2.    Division 033000 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for specific requirements and limitations
                 regarding concrete mixtures and accessories.
           3.    Division 034500 “Precast Architectural Concrete” for specific requirements and
                 limitations regarding precast elements.
           4.    Division 055000 “Metal Fabrications” for specific requirements and limitations regarding
                 steel elements.
           5.    Division 071800 – “Traffic Coatings” for specific requirements and limitations for
                 substitutions regarding Traffic Coatings.
           6.    Division 079200 – “Joint Sealants” for specific requirements and limitations for
                 substitutions regarding Joint Sealants.
           7.    Division 099600 – “High Performance Coatings” for specific requirements and
                 limitations for substitutions regarding paints and primers.




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                              014000 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
           execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
           construction will comply with requirements.

      B.   Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
           execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
           completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
           enforcement activities performed by Project Manager.

      C.   Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
           agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
           establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

      D.   Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
           plant, mill, factory, or shop.

      E.   Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
           of the Work and for completed Work.

      F.   Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
           laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

      G.   Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
           employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
           including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

           1.    Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
                 certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
                 that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

      H.   Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
           completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
           being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
           authorities having jurisdiction.


1.4        CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

      A.   Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
           establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
           with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
           apparently equal, to Project Manager for a decision before proceeding.

      B.   Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
           the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
           minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
           To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
           appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Project Manager for a
           decision before proceeding.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                              014000 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


1.5        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
           responsibilities.

      B.   Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

      C.   Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
           demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
           recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

      D.   Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

           1.    Specification Section number and title.
           2.    Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
           3.    Description of test and inspection.
           4.    Identification of applicable standards.
           5.    Identification of test and inspection methods.
           6.    Number of tests and inspections required.
           7.    Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
           8.    Requirements for obtaining samples.
           9.    Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.


1.6        CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

      A.   Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within ten days of Notice of Award,
           and not less than seven days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable
           to Project Manager. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and
           forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities.
           Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

      B.   Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and
           experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures
           similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

           1.    Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

      C.   Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
           review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible
           for submittal review.

      D.   Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work
           requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

           1.    Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and
                 inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and
                 inspections.
           2.    Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
                 "Statement of Special Inspections."
           3.    Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                              014000 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


      E.   Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during
           construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and
           inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into
           compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved
           mockups.

      F.   Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
           approved and rejected results. Include work Project Manager has indicated as nonconforming
           or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance
           with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


1.7        REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

      A.   Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
           Sections. Include the following:

           1.    Date of issue.
           2.    Project title and number.
           3.    Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
           4.    Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
           5.    Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
           6.    Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
           7.    Identification of product and Specification Section.
           8.    Complete test or inspection data.
           9.    Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
           10.   Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
                 inspecting.
           11.   Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
                 the Contract Document requirements.
           12.   Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
           13.   Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

      B.   Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports:        Prepare written information
           documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
           Sections. Include the following:

           1.    Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
           2.    Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
           3.    Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
           4.    Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
                 requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
           5.    Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
                 complies with requirements.
           6.    Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
           7.    Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

      C.   Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
           manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
           other Sections. Include the following:




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                           014000 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


           1.    Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
                 making report.
           2.    Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
           3.    Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
                 complies with requirements.
           4.    Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
           5.    Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

      D.   Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
           certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
           payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
           compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


1.8        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
           required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

      B.   Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
           to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
           well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

      C.   Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
           for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
           production capacity to produce required units.

      D.   Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
           work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
           resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

      E.   Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
           practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
           engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
           for installations of a system, assembly, or product that is similar in material, design, and extent
           to those indicated for this Project.

      F.   Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
           manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
           of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
           this Project.

      G.   Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
           manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
           manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
           Project.

      H.   Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
           experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
           to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
           required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                               014000 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


           1.    NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
           2.    NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
                 Laboratory Accreditation Program.


1.9        QUALITY CONTROL

      A.   Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
           Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

           1.    Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
                 agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
                 perform.
           2.    Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
                 authorized by Change Orders.
           3.    Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
                 that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

      B.   Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
           Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
           the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

           1.    Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
                 by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of
                 Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
           2.    Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
                 agency to perform these quality-control services.

                 a.     Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
                        writing by Owner.

           3.    Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
                 testing or inspecting will be performed.
           4.    Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
                 certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
           5.    Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
                 Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
           6.    Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
                 when they so direct.

      C.   Manufacturer's Field Services:      Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
           representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
           service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
           Procedures."

      D.   Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
           representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
           services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
           conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
           portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                               014000 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                              01/27/2011


  E.    Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
        responsibility, Contractor shall provide quality-control services, including retesting and
        reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract
        Documents.

  F.    Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Project Manager and Contractor in
        performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

        1.    Notify Project Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies
              observed in the Work during performance of its services.
        2.    Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
              are conducted.
        3.    Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
              inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
        4.    Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
              quality-control service through Contractor.
        5.    Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
              or accept any portion of the Work.
        6.    Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

  G.    Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
        similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
        agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
        following:

        1.    Access to the Work.
        2.    Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
        3.    Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
              inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
        4.    Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
        5.    Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
        6.    Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
              agency.
        7.    Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
              site.

  H.    Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
        and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
        replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

        1.    Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

  I.    Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
        control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-
        control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.
        Update as the Work progresses.

        1.    Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Project Manager, testing agencies, and each
              party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are
              required.




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                              014000 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


1.10       SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

      A.   Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct
           special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of
           Owner, as indicated in Statement of Special Inspections in contract drawings, and as follows:

           1.    Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
                 and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
           2.    Notifying Project Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies
                 observed in the Work during performance of its services.
           3.    Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
                 service to Project Manager with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
           4.    Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
                 which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
           5.    Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
                 work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES

      A.   Strata; 8653 Hackamore Drive, Boise, ID 83709

      B.   MTI; 2791 S Victory View Way, Boise, ID 83709


3.2        TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

      A.   Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

           1.    Date test or inspection was conducted.
           2.    Description of the Work tested or inspected.
           3.    Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Project Manager.
           4.    Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

      B.   Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
           and inspection log for Project Manager’s reference during normal working hours.


3.3        REPAIR AND PROTECTION

      A.   General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
           damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

           1.    Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
                 Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
                 areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                               014000 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11            City Centre Stair Replacement Project                  01/27/2011


              as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
              in Division 01 Section 017300 "Execution."

  B.    Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

  C.    Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
        responsibility for quality-control services.


END OF SECTION 014000




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS                                                                    014000 - 9
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stairs Replacement Project                     01/27/2011



SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
           protection facilities.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility
                 interruptions.


1.3        USE CHARGES

      A.   General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included
           in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services
           and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Project Manager and occupants of
           Project.

      B.   Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for
           construction operations.

      C.   Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is
           available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
           and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


1.4        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
           construction personnel.

      B.   Traffic Safety Plan: Approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

      C.   Lane Closure/Restriction Plan: Approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

      D.   Rigging and Hoisting Plan: Approved by authorities having jurisdiction.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS                                                              015000 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stairs Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
           electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

      B.   Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
           temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.


1.6        PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.   Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
           responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
           use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
           responsibilities.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MATERIALS

      A.   Contractor shall be responsible to select appropriate materials and methods to identify the
           construction area at each stair tower and at each main elevator landing such that the general
           public does not enter any of the Project site during the duration of construction. The Contractor
           is responsible for the safety of each area of work. All access to stairs and elevator landing
           under construction shall be blocked by locked chain link fencing. All doors leading to areas
           under construction shall be locked for the duration of the work. The Contractor shall coordinate
           with Capital City Development Corporation prior to construction to advise of the proposed
           materials and methods be used to keep each area of work safe. The contractor shall meet the
           requirements of the Fire Marshal and building department of the governing jurisdiction.


2.2        TEMPORARY FACILITIES

      A.   Field Offices, General: Mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and
           support adequate for normal loading.

      B.   Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Project
           Manager and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings
           specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip
           offices as follows:

           1.    Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
                 racks, and bookcases.
           2.    Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
                 electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
                 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot square
                 tack and marker boards.
           3.    Drinking water.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS                                                                015000 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stairs Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


           4.    Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
                 to 72 deg F.
           5.    Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

      C.   Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
           materials and equipment for construction operations. Refer to Section 011000 "Summary" for
           additional requirements.

           1.    Store combustible materials apart from building.


2.3        EQUIPMENT

      A.   Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
           locations and classes of fire exposures.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        INSTALLATION, GENERAL

      A.   Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
           with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
           Work.

      B.   Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay.


3.2        TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

      A.   Water Service: Do not connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Water supply is not
           available on all floors of Owner’s facility. Contractor shall furnish own water supply for
           construction operations.

      B.   Wastewater: Dispose of any wastewater from construction operations at an approved off-site
           location. Do not dispose of wastewater into Owner’s sanitary sewer system, public storm drains
           or tree wells.

      C.   Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
           construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
           number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

      D.   Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
           for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
           adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
           harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

      E.   Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering
           occupied areas.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS                                                              015000 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stairs Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


           1.    Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-
                 producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-
                 containment devices.
           2.    Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-
                 equipped vacuum equipment.


      F.   Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
           activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
           from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
           completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
           produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

           1.    Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to
                 level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
           2.    Provide ventilation of elevator vestibule and stairwells as required for installation of
                 coating systems. Ventilation shall be adequate to confine vapors resulting from coating
                 system application to areas of work and prevent intrusion into occupied spaces and
                 adjacent properties.

      G.   Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service.              Maintain
           equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

      H.   Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
           for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

           1.    Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
                 without operating entire system.

      I.   Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office
           adequate for use by Project Manager and Owner to access Project electronic documents and
           maintain electronic communications.


3.3        SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

      A.   General: Comply with the following:

           1.    Provide location for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area
                 or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
                 Comply with NFPA 241.
           2.    Maintain support facilities until Project Manager schedules Substantial Completion
                 inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
                 Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions
                 acceptable to Owner.

      B.   Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

           1.    Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
           2.    Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS                                                                  015000 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stairs Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


           3.    Comply with requirements of approved Traffic Safety Plan and approved Lane
                 Closure/Restriction Plan.

      C.   Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for authorized construction
           personnel. Contractor shall submit list of personnel working on the project to facility operator
           that will be authorized to use designated parking areas.

      D.   Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators
           are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
           restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide
           shoes, and similar items of limited life.

           1.    Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
           2.    Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect
                 elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become
                 damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of
                 correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make
                 required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
           3.    Refer to section article 011000.1.9.A for additional requirements regarding elevator use
                 and control.

      E.   Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
           are not adequate.

      F.   Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
           permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of
           Substantial Completion.

      G.   Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
           "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

      H.   Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

           1.    Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
                 equipment" and not temporary facilities.
           2.    Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel consistent with approved
                 Rigging and Hoisting Plan.


3.4        SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

      A.   Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities,
           and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
           removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

      B.   Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
           construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
           air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

           1.    Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section 011000 "Summary."




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS                                                                 015000 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stairs Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


      C.   Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
           of construction. Lock entrances to work to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
           damage to work at all times during construction activities.

      D.   Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
           jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

      E.   Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
           and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

      F.   Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
           progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
           activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

           1.    Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate
                 temporary enclosures.

      G.   Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
           of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
           systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. Tree wells shall not be used to dispose of waste
           water or other fluids or waste.

      H.   Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
           fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
           entrance gates.

           1.    Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
                 sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
           2.    Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
                 personnel.


3.5        OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

      A.   Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

      B.   Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
           ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
           Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
           have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
           clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

           1.    Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
                 Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
           2.    Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required
                 by authorities having jurisdiction.
           3.    At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
                 construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
                 Section "Closeout Procedures."




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS                                                                 015000 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11    City Centre Stairs Replacement Project   01/27/2011


END OF SECTION 015000




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS                                015000 - 7
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011



SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
           Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
           products; special warranties; and comparable products.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
           taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
           "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

           1.    Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
                 model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
                 literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
           2.    New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
                 facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
                 products.
           3.    Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
                 process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
                 performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
                 exceed those of specified product.

      B.   Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
           product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
           model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
           function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
           characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
           named in the specification.




PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS                                                                            016000 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.4        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
           Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
           Section number and title.

           1.    Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in Article 016002.2.
                 "Comparable Products".
           2.    Project Manager’s Action: If necessary, Project Manager will request additional
                 information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable
                 product request. Project Manager will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of
                 proposed comparable product request within seven days of receipt of request, or seven
                 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

                 a.     Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
                 b.     Use product specified if Project Manager does not issue a decision on use of a
                        comparable product request within time allocated.

      B.   Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01
           Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
           products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
           previously selected products were also options.


1.6        PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.   The Contractor shall deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will
           prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with
           manufacturer's written instructions.

      B.   Delivery and Handling:

           1.    Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
                 overcrowding of construction spaces.
           2.    Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
                 are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
                 losses.
           3.    Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
                 sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
                 handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
           4.    Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
                 to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

      C.   Storage:

           1.    Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS                                                                             016000 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


           2.    Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
           3.    Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
                 enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
           4.    Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
                 installation and concealment.
           5.    Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
                 ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
           6.    Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
           7.    Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
                 equipment by Contractor’s construction forces.
           8.    See Article 011001.8.D. for requirements for storage areas.


1.7        PRODUCT WARRANTIES

      A.   Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
           warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
           product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
           Documents.

           1.    Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
                 particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
           2.    Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
                 specific rights for Owner.

      B.   Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
           identification, ready for execution.

           1.    Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
                 properly executed.
           2.    Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
                 written document using indicated form properly executed.
           3.    See Divisions 07 Sections 071800 and 079200, Division 03 Section 034500
                 "Architectural Precast Concrete", and Division 09 Section 099600 "High Performance
                 Coatings" for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting
                 special warranties.

      C.   Submittal Time:     Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section 017700 "Closeout
           Procedures."


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

      A.   General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
           are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

           1.    Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
                 needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS                                                                          016000 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


        2.    Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
              specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
              successfully in similar situations on other projects.
        3.    Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
              requirements of the Contract Documents.
        4.    Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Project Manager will make
              selection.
        5.    Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
              establish salient characteristics of products.
        6.    Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or
              "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in Article 016002.2.
              "Comparable Products" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.


  B.    Product Selection Procedures:

        1.    Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
              named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
              for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
        2.    Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
              provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
              Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
              considered.
        3.    Products:

              a.    Restricted List:     Where Specifications include a list of names of both
                    manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
                    requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
                    will not be considered.
              b.    Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
                    manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
                    product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in Article
                    016002.2 "Comparable Products" for consideration of an unnamed product.

        4.    Manufacturers:

              a.    Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
                    provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
                    requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
                    will not be considered.
              b.    Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
                    provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
                    manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
                    Article 016002.2 "Comparable Products" for consideration of an unnamed
                    manufacturer's product.

        5.    Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
              indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
              indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
              Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
              that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in Article 016002.2


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS                                                                           016000 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


                 "Comparable Products" for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other
                 named manufacturers.

      C.   Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Project
           Manager from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
           requirements. Project Manager will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from
           manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.


2.2        COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

      A.   Conditions for Consideration: Project Manager will consider Contractor's request for
           comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are
           not satisfied, Project Manager may return requests without action, except to record
           noncompliance with these requirements:

           1.    Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents
                 that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
                 and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
           2.    Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
                 Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
                 durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
           3.    Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
           4.    List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
                 names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
           5.    Samples, if requested.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


END OF SECTION 016000




PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS                                                                             016000 - 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                      01/27/2011



SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
           Work including, but not limited to, the following:

           1.    Construction layout.
           2.    Field engineering and surveying.
           3.    Installation of the Work.
           4.    Cutting and patching.
           5.    Coordination of Owner-installed products.
           6.    Progress cleaning.
           7.    Starting and adjusting.
           8.    Protection of installed construction.
           9.    Correction of the Work.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
           2.    Division 01 Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
           3.    Division 01 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" recording of Owner-accepted
                 deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
           4.    Division 02 Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal
                 of selected portions of the building.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
           other work.

      B.   Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
           installation of other work.


1.4        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer.




EXECUTION                                                                                      017300 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


      B.   Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
           improvements comply with requirements.


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
           in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
           services of the kind indicated.

      B.   Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
           construction elements.

           1.    Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Project
                 Manager of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Project Manager
                 before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and
                 patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their
                 load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

                 a.     Existing concrete slabs and beams at elevator landings.
                 b.     Existing precast concrete façade elements of garage.

           2.    Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
                 in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
                 increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements
                 include the following:

                 a.     Primary operational systems and equipment.
                 b.     Elevator control systems.
                 c.     Electrical wiring systems.

           3.    Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
                 components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
                 reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
                 decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not
                 limited to the following:

                 a.     Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
                 b.     Membranes and flashings.

           4.    Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
                 evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
                 that would, in Project Manager's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
                 Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
                 unsatisfactory manner.

      C.   Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
           recommendations and instructions for installation of products.




EXECUTION                                                                                         017300 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MATERIALS

      A.   General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

      B.   In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
           surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
           possible.

           1.    If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
                 will provide a match acceptable to Project Manager for the visual and functional
                 performance of in-place materials.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        EXAMINATION

      A.   Existing Conditions: Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and
           location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction
           affecting the Work.

      B.   Circuit Breaker Box: Before disrupting electrical service to disconnect lights in the existing
           stair, identify circuits that require disruption. Electrical service must be maintained to the
           garage and adjacent structures.

      C.   Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
           Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
           indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
           affecting performance. Record observations.

           1.    Examine floors for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.
           2.    Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
                 existing finishes or primers.

      D.   Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
           Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

           1.    Description of the Work.
           2.    List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
           3.    List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
           4.    Recommended corrections.

      E.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
           with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.




EXECUTION                                                                                         017300 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


3.2        PREPARATION

      A.   Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
           measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
           other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
           fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
           Work.

      B.   Space Requirements:     Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
           diagrammatically on Drawings.

      C.   Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
           clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
           of Contractor, submit a request for information to Project Manager according to requirements in
           Division 01 Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


3.3        CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

      A.   Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
           Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
           discovered, notify Project Manager promptly.

      B.   General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

           1.    Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
                 construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
           2.    Establish limits on use of Project site.
           3.    Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
                 required dimensions.
           4.    Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
           5.    Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
           6.    Notify Project Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
                 tolerances.
           7.    Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
                 by authorities having jurisdiction.

      C.   Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
           foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
           electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
           Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

      D.   Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
           levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
           duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
           available for reference by Project Manager.




EXECUTION                                                                                       017300 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


3.4        FIELD ENGINEERING

      A.   Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
           points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
           points during construction operations.

           1.    Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
                 approval of Project Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control
                 points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
                 Project Manager before proceeding.
           2.    Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
                 replacements on the original survey control points.


3.5        INSTALLATION

      A.   General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
           elevation, as indicated.

           1.    Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
           2.    Conceal wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

      B.   Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
           applications indicated.

      C.   Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
           Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

      D.   Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
           loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

      E.   Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
           items on site and placement in permanent locations.

      F.   Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
           factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
           adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
           requirements.

      G.   Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

      H.   Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
           hazardous.

      I.   Attachment: Provide attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number
           to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions
           of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type
           required for load conditions.

           1.    Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
                 directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and



EXECUTION                                                                                         017300 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


                 items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to
                 Project site in time for installation.

      J.   Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
           arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.


3.6        CUTTING AND PATCHING

      A.   Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
           Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

           1.    Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
                 of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
                 original condition.

      B.   Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

      C.   Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
           Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
           exposed during cutting and patching operations.

      D.   Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of
           free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
           requirements in Division 01 Section 011000 "Summary."

      E.   Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
           are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
           cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

      F.   Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
           operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
           adjoining construction.

           1.    In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
                 hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
                 minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
           2.    Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
           3.    Electrical Services: Cut off conduit in slabs or suspended from slabs to be removed.
                 Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of conduit to prevent entrance of moisture
                 or other foreign matter after cutting.
           4.    Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

      G.   Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
           following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
           practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
           Sections, where applicable.

           1.    Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
                 demonstrate physical integrity of installation.




EXECUTION                                                                                           017300 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


           2.    Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
                 restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence
                 of patching and refinishing.

                 a.     Clean conduit and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
                        materials.

      H.   Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
           mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.


3.7        PROGRESS CLEANING

      A.   General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.                  Enforce
           requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

           1.    Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
                 debris.
           2.    Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
                 the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
           3.    Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
                 Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

                 a.     Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

           4.    Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors
                 are working concurrently.

      B.   Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

      C.   Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
           proper execution of the Work.

           1.    Remove liquid spills promptly.
           2.    Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
                 entire work area, as appropriate.

      D.   Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
           instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
           specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
           materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

      E.   Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
           freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

      F.   Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
           down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01
           Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal".




EXECUTION                                                                                           017300 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


      G.   During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
           materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
           damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

      H.   Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
           construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
           deleterious exposure during the construction period.


3.8        PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

      A.   Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
           or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

      B.   Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


END OF SECTION 017300




EXECUTION                                                                                       017300 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                      01/27/2011



SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

           1.    Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
           2.    Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 02 Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste
                 resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Construction Waste: Building materials and other solid waste resulting from construction,
           remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

      B.   Demolition Waste: Building materials resulting from selective demolition operations.

      C.   Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
           recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
           jurisdiction.

      D.   Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
           preparation for reuse.

      E.   Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
           facility.


1.4        PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.   General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total
           non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the
           use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
           demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of
           materials, including the following:



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL                                                     017419 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


           1.    Demolition Waste:

                 a.     Concrete.
                 b.     Concrete reinforcing steel.
                 c.     Structural and miscellaneous steel.

           2.    Construction Waste:

                 a.     Metals.
                 b.     Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph
                        above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
                        materials:

                        1)    Paper.
                        2)    Cardboard.
                        3)    Boxes.
                        4)    Plastic sheet and film.
                        5)    Polystyrene packaging.
                        6)    Wood crates.
                        7)    Plastic pails.


1.5        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 14 days from the date the contract is rewarded.


1.6        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
           report. Use for suitable to Owner that includes the following information:

           1.    Material category.
           2.    Generation point of waste.
           3.    Total quantity of waste in tons.
           4.    Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
           5.    Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
           6.    Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
           7.    Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

      B.   Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
           organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

      C.   Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
           by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
           tickets, receipts, and invoices.

      D.   Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
           and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
           and invoices.




CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL                                                       017419 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.7        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
           jurisdiction.

      B.   Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
           requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods
           and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

           1.    Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste
                 management coordinator.
           2.    Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
                 disposition.
           3.    Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
                 containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
           4.    Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
                 disposal facilities.
           5.    Review waste management requirements for each trade.


1.8        WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

      A.   General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
           this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
           cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate
           quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management
           plan.

      B.   Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction
           waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

      C.   Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
           or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of
           each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation
           procedures.

           1.    Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
                 Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
                 Work.
           2.    Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
                 organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
           3.    Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
                 materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
           4.    Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
                 name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
           5.    Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
                 recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location
                 where materials separation will be performed.




CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL                                                       017419 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


      D.   Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
           management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste
           management plan. Include the following:

           1.    Total quantity of waste.
           2.    Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of
                 collection containers for each type of waste.
           3.    Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).
           4.    Revenue from salvaged materials.
           5.    Revenue from recycled materials.
           6.    Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
           7.    Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
           8.    Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of
                 waste.
           9.    Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

      A.   General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
           signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
           during the entire duration of the Contract.

           1.    Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section
                 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

      B.   Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
           procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

           1.    Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
                 return.
           2.    Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
                 plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

      C.   Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
           minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
           used facilities.

           1.    Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
                 are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
           2.    Comply with Division 01 Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for
                 controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.




CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL                                                      017419 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


3.2        SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

      A.   Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

           1.    Clean salvaged items.
           2.    Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating
                 elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.
           3.    Store items in a secure area until installation.
           4.    Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
           5.    Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and
                 equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to
                 make items functional for use indicated.

      B.   Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.


3.3        RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

      A.   General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

      B.   Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
           recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.

      C.   Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
           or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
           contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

      D.   Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
           recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
           construction waste management plan.

           1.    Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
                 removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
                 container and bin.

                 a.     Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
                        if found.

           2.    Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
                 grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
           3.    Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
                 remaining trees.
           4.    Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
           5.    Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
                 processor.


3.4        RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

      A.   Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

           1.    Pulverize concrete to maximum 4-inch size.


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL                                                      017419 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


      B.   Metals: Separate metals by type.

           1.    Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
           2.    Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.


3.5        RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

      A.   Packaging:

           1.    Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
                 location.
           2.    Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
           3.    Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
                 Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
                 pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
           4.    Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
                 for recycling wood.

      B.   Wood Materials:

           1.    Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
           2.    Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.


3.6        DISPOSAL OF WASTE

      A.   General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
           waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
           acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

           1.    Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
                 accumulate on-site.
           2.    Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
                 and areas.

      B.   Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

      C.   Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.


END OF SECTION 017419




CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL                                                    017419 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011



SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
           but not limited to, the following:

           1.    Substantial Completion procedures.
           2.    Final completion procedures.
           3.    Warranties.
           4.    Final cleaning.
           5.    Repair of the Work.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
           2.    Division 07 Section 071800 “Traffic Coatings”, Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”, and
                 Division 09 Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings" for specific closeout and
                 special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.
           3.    Division 01 Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record
                 Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.


1.3        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: For cleaning agents.

      B.   Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

      C.   Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.


1.4        CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

      A.   Contractor shall submit the following items at time of closeout:

           1.    Warranties for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,
                 fees, and similar obligations were paid
           2.    Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
           3.    AIA Document G706, “Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”.
           4.    AIA Document G706A, “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens”.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES                                                                              017700 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


           5.    Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
           6.    Project record documents.


1.5        SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

      A.   Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
           corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
           the Work is incomplete.

      B.   Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten days
           prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
           that are incomplete at time of request.

           1.    Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
                 permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
                 Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
           2.    Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
                 record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
                 photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
                 final record information.
           3.    Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections 034500, 071800, 079200
                 and 099600, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
                 agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
           4.    Submit test/adjust/balance records.


      C.   Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten days
           prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
           that are incomplete at time of request.

           1.    Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
           2.    Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
                 responders.
           3.    Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
                 construction tools, and similar elements.
           4.    Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
           5.    Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
                 defects.

      D.   Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
           minimum of ten days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
           tests. On receipt of request, Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify
           Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Project Manager will prepare the Certificate of
           Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's
           list or additional items identified by Project Manager, that must be completed or corrected
           before certificate will be issued.

           1.    Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
                 incomplete is completed or corrected.
           2.    Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES                                                                               017700 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.6        FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

      A.   Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
           completion, complete the following:

           1.    Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section 012900
                 "Payment Procedures."
           2.    Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Project Manager's
                 Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list),
                 endorsed and dated by Project Manager. Certified copy of the list shall state that each
                 item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
           3.    Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
                 complying with insurance requirements.

      B.   Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
           ten days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
           receipt of request, Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
           unfulfilled requirements. Project Manager will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
           inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before
           certificate will be issued.

           1.    Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
                 incomplete is completed or corrected.


1.7        LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

      A.   Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
           construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
           necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

           1.    Organize list of spaces in sequential order, proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
           2.    Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for slabs,
                 precast stairs, and guardrails/handrails.
           3.    Include the following information at the top of each page:

                 a.    Project name.
                 b.    Date.
                 c.    Name of Project Manager.
                 d.    Name of Contractor.
                 e.    Page number.

           4.    Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:


                 a.    MS Excel electronic file. Project Manager will return annotated file.




CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES                                                                              017700 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


1.8        SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES


      A.   Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Project Manager for designated
           portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial
           Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights
           under warranty.

      B.   Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 30 days of completion of
           designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
           construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

      C.   Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
           Manual.

           1.    Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
                 thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
                 paper. Provide two sets of binders to Owner.
           2.    Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
                 tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
                 installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
                 number of Installer.
           3.    Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
                 "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
           4.    Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
                 and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
                 navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of
                 document.

      D.   Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MATERIALS

      A.   Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
           fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
           hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

           1.    Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
                 applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
                 allowable VOC levels.




CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES                                                                             017700 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        FINAL CLEANING

      A.   General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
           with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
           regulations.

      B.   Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
           surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
           maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

           1.    Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
                 of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

                 a.    Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
                       including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
                       foreign substances.
                 b.    Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
                       foreign deposits.
                 c.    Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
                       Project site.
                 d.    Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
                 e.    Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
                       free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
                       weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
                       condition.
                 f.    Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
                 g.    Remove labels that are not permanent.
                 h.    Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
                       similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
                       other foreign substances.
                 i.    Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
                       resulting from water exposure.
                 j.    Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
                 k.    Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

      C.   Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section
           017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal".


3.2        REPAIR OF THE WORK

      A.   Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
           Substantial Completion.

      B.   Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
           parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
           adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
           provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES                                                                              017700 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


        Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
        condition.

        1.    Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
              damaged transparent materials.
        2.    Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
              Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

              a.    Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
                    mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
                    identification.

        3.    Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
              operation or reduce longevity.
        4.    Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
              noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
              new fixtures.


END OF SECTION 017700




CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES                                                                        017700 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011



SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
           including the following:

           1.    Record Drawings.
           2.    Record Specifications.
           3.    Record Product Data.
           4.    Record Shop Drawings.
           5.    Miscellaneous record submittals.

      B.   Related Requirements:
           1.    Division 01 Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.


1.3        CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

      A.   Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

           1.    Number of Copies: Submit two sets of marked-up record prints.

      B.   Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
           and contract modifications.

      C.   Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

      D.   Record Shop Drawings: Submit two paper copies of each submittal.

      E.   Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-
           keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
           one paper copy of each submittal.




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                      017839 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        RECORD DRAWINGS

      A.   Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
           Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

           1.    Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
                 from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
                 whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
                 information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

                 a.    Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
                       difficult to identify or measure and record later.
                 b.    Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
                 c.    Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
                 d.    Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
                 e.    Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
                       documentation.

           2.    Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

                 a.    Dimensional changes to Drawings.
                 b.    Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
                 c.    Depths of foundations below first floor.
                 d.    Locations and depths of underground utilities.
                 e.    Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
                 f.    Revisions to electrical circuitry.
                 g.    Actual equipment locations.
                 h.    Duct size and routing.
                 i.    Locations of concealed internal utilities.
                 j.    Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.
                 k.    Changes made following Project Manager's written orders.
                 l.    Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
                 m.    Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
                 n.    Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

           3.    Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
                 personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
                 prints.
           4.    Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
                 between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
           5.    Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
                 from original Drawings.
           6.    Note Work Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and
                 similar identification, where applicable.

      B.   Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
           DRAWING" in a prominent location.




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                        017839 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


           1.    Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
                 manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
                 on cover sheets.
           2.    Identification: As follows:

                 a.    Project name.
                 b.    Date.
                 c.    Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
                 d.    Name of Project Manager.
                 e.    Name of Contractor.


2.2        RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

      A.   Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
           varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

           1.    Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
                 cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

      B.   Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.


2.3        RECORD PRODUCT DATA

      A.   Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
           varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

           1.    Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
                 cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
           2.    Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
                 manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
           3.    Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
                 applicable.

      B.   Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF
           electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

           1.    Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
                 title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.


2.4        MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

      A.   Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
           record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
           miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

      B.   Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF
           electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                       017839 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


           1.    Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section
                 number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

      A.   Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
           record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
           occur; do not wait until end of Project.

      B.   Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
           field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
           documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
           dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
           documents for Project Manager's reference during normal working hours.

      C.   Submitting:   Submit Record Documents to Project Manager prior to application for final
           payment.


END OF SECTION 017839




PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS                                                                       017839 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11                  City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011



SECTION 024119 – SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section Includes:

           1.    Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

      B.   Related Requirements:

           1.    Division 01 Section 011000 “Summary” for restrictions on the use of the premises,
                 Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

           2.    Division 01 Section 017300 “Execution” for cutting and patching procedures.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
           indicated to be removed and salvaged, removed and reinstalled, or removed and recycled.

      B.   Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
           that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, removed and reinstalled,
           or removed and recycled.


1.4        MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

      A.   Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.


1.5        PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

      A.   Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

           1.    Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

           2.    Review structural load limitations of existing structure.




SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION                                                                  024119 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11                  City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


           3.    Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
                 demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
                 delays.

           4.    Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
                 by selective demolition operations.

           5.    Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


1.6        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
           proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control,
           and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

      B.   Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

           1.    Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
                 dates for each activity.

           2.    Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.


1.7        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Contractor Qualifications: All work shall be performed by skilled contactors having successful
           experience in comparable protection, salvage and removal operations including work on at least
           three (3) projects similar in scope and scale to this Project in the last five years. Submit
           references with name of contact person and telephone number for the three (3) submitted similar
           projects. All work to be performed by individuals whose qualifications have been submitted and
           approved.

      B.   Contractor is hereby directed to recognize the value and significance of the building and
           exercise special care during the work to ensure that the existing building, its details, materials
           and finishes which are to remain are not damaged by the work being performed.

      C.   Contractor shall be responsible for protection of all existing materials and components to
           remain in place, throughout the duration of construction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

      A.   Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
           beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
           having jurisdiction.

      B.   Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION                                                                    024119 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11                  City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        EXAMINATION

      A.   Verity that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
           operations.

      B.   Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
           guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

      C.   Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
           selective demolition required.

      D.   When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
           function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
           Promptly submit a written report to engineer.

      E.   Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
           element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
           adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

           1.    Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
                 demolition activities.


3.2        UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

      A.   Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems and protect them against damage.


3.3        PREPARATION

      A.   Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
           operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, entry and exit drives for parking
           garage, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

           1.    Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section
                 “Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

      B.   Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
           injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

           1.    Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people and motor vehicles around selective
                 demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

      C.   Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
           to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
           to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
           being demolished

       1.   Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION                                                           024119 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11                  City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


3.4        SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

      A.   General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
           construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
           governing regulations and as follows:

           1.    Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
                 selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
                 members on the next lower level.

           2.    Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
                 cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
                 Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
                 chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
                 remain.

           3.    Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
                 free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

           4.    Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
                 impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

           5.    Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
                 Division 01 Section 017419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal.”


3.5        SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

      A.   Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at
           least ¾ inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from
           reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove
           remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

      B.   Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
           and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.


3.6        DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

      A.   General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
           otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, remove demolished materials from Project site
           and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

           1.    Do not all demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

           2.    Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
                 and areas.

           3.    Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 017419 “Construction Waste
                 Management and Disposal”.

  B.   Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION                                                             024119 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11                 City Centre Stair Replacement Project                   01/27/2011


3.7        CLEANING

      A.   Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
           demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
           operations began.


END OF SECTION 024119




SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION                                                                024119 - 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011



SECTION 030130 - MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   This Section includes the following:

           1.    Removal of deteriorated concrete and reinforcement and subsequent replacement and
                 patching.
           2.    Floor joint repair.
           3.    Epoxy crack injection.
           4.    Corrosion-inhibiting treatment.
           5.    Polymer overlays.
           6.    Polymer sealers.
           7.    Steel structural reinforcement.

      B.   Related Sections include the following:

           1.    Division 02 Section 024119 “Selective Structure Demolition”.

           2.    Division 03 Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

           3.    Division 05 Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for concrete repair with structural steel
                 framing.


1.3        UNIT PRICES

      A.   General: Unit prices include the cost of preparing existing construction to receive the work
           indicated and costs of field quality control required for units of work completed.

      B.   Concrete Removal and Replacement or Patching: Work will be paid for by the cubic foot
           computed on the basis of rectangular solid shapes approximating the actual shape of concrete
           removed and replaced with average depths, widths, and lengths, measured to the nearest inch).

      C.   Epoxy Crack Injection: Work will be paid for by the linear foot of crack injected.

      D.   Polymer Overlays: Work will be paid for by the square foot of exposed overlay surface.

      E.   Composite Structural Reinforcement: Work will be paid for by the square foot of composite
           material applied.


MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                     030130 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


1.4        PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

      A.   Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site


1.5        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions,
           chemical composition, physical properties, test data, and mixing, preparation, and application
           instructions.

      B.    Shoring Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer
           detailing temporary shoring and supports. Include schedule and sequence for erection and
           removal relative to removal of deteriorated concrete and reinforcement and subsequent repair
           and reinforcement.

      C.   Samples: Cured samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in
           manufacturer's standard size appropriate for each type of work.

      D.   Samples for Initial Selection: Cured samples for each exposed product and for each color and
           texture specified.

           1.    Include sets of patching-material Samples in the form of briquettes, at least 3 inches long
                 by 1-1/2 inches wide] representative of the range of concrete colors on the building.
                 Document each Sample with product, mix, and or other information necessary to
                 replicate it.
           2.    Include sets of polymer-overlay Samples in the form of treated cementitious tiles at least
                 4 inches long by 4 inches (representative of the range of required colors and textures.
           3.    Include sets of polymer-sealer Samples in the form of treated cementitious tiles at least 4
                 inches long by 4 inches wide representative of the range of required colors and textures.
           4.    Have each set of Samples contain a close color range of at least three. Samples of
                 different mixes of materials that match the variations in existing, adjacent concrete when
                 cured and dry.

      E.   Samples for Verification: Cured samples for each exposed product and for each color and
           texture specified.

           1.    Include Samples of each required type, color, and texture of patching material in the form
                 of patches in drilled holes or sawed joints in sample concrete representative of the range
                 of concrete colors on the building.
           2.    Include Samples of each required type, color, and texture of polymer-overlay material in
                 the form of cementitious tiles at least 8 inches long by 8 inches wide
           3.    Include Samples of each required type, color, and texture of polymer-sealer material in
                 the form of cementitious tiles at least 8 inches long by 8 inches wide.


1.6        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Qualification Data: For installers.




MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                      030130 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


           1.    For products required to be installed by workers approved by product manufacturers,
                 include letters of acceptance by product manufacturers certifying that installers are
                 approved to apply their products.

      B.   Material Certificates: For each type of Portland cement and aggregate supplied for mixing or
           adding to products at Project site.

      C.   Product Test Reports: For each manufactured bonding agent cementitious patching mortar,
           joint-filler, crack injection adhesive, polymer overlay and polymer sealer, for tests performed by
           manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.


1.7        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Contractor Qualifications: All work shall be performed by skilled contractors having successful
           experience in comparable protection, salvage, and removal operations including work on at least
           three (3) projects similar in scope and scale to this project in the last five years. Submit
           references with name of contact person and telephone number for three (3) submitted similar
           projects. All work to be performed by individuals whose qualifications have been submitted
           and approved.

      B.   Manufacturer Qualifications: Each manufactured bonding-agent, cementitious patching-mortar,
           joint-filler, crack-injection-adhesive, polymer-overlay, and polymer-sealer. Manufacturer shall
           employ factory-trained technical representatives who are available for consultation and Project-
           site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.

      C.   Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
           approved by manufacturer to apply packaged patching-mortar materials, ,epoxy crack injection
           materials, corrosion-inhibiting treatments, polymer overlays, polymer sealers.

      D.   Maintenance Program: Prepare a written plan for maintenance of cast-in-place concrete,
           including each phase or process, protection of surrounding materials during operations, and
           control of debris and runoff during the Work. Describe in detail materials, methods, equipment,
           and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the Work.

      E.   Source Limitations: Obtain concrete patching and rebuilding materials through one source from
           a single manufacturer.

      F.   Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
           Division 01 Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination.”


1.8        DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.   Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled
           with type and name of products and manufacturers.

      B.   Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature
           requirements and other conditions for storage.

      C.   Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.


MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                         030130 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


      D.   Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required characteristics
           can be maintained and contamination avoided.


1.9        FIELD CONDITIONS

      A.   Environmental Limitations for Epoxies: Do not apply when air and substrate temperatures are
           outside limits permitted by manufacturer. During hot weather, cool epoxy components before
           mixing, store mixed products in shade, and cool unused mixed products to retard setting. Do
           not apply to wet substrates unless approved by manufacturer.

           1.    Use only Class A epoxies when substrate temperatures are below or are expected to go
                 below 40 deg F (5 deg C) within 8 hours.
           2.    Use only Class A or B epoxies when substrate temperatures are below or are expected to
                 go below 60 deg F (16 deg C) within 8 hours.
           3.    Use only Class C epoxies when substrate temperatures are above and are expected to stay
                 above 60 deg F (16 deg C) for 8 hours.

      B.   Cold-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Do not apply unless air temperature is
           above 40 deg F (5 deg C) and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.

      C.   Cold-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials:            Comply with the following
           procedures:

           1.    When air temperature is below 40 deg F (5 deg C), heat patching material ingredients and
                 existing concrete to produce temperatures between 40 and 90 deg F (5 and 32 deg C).
           2.    When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and plus 5 deg C),
                 cover completed Work with weather-resistant insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair
                 or provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within
                 the enclosure for 48 hours after repair.
           3.    When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C), provide enclosure
                 and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 48
                 hours after repair.

      D.   Hot-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Protect repair work when temperature
           and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from patching materials.
           Provide artificial shade and wind breaks, and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply to
           substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MATERIALS, GENERAL

      A.   Source Limitations: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of product from single
           source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
           properties.

      B.   VOC Content:      Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
           jurisdiction.


MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                      030130 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                   01/27/2011


2.2        BONDING AGENTS

      A.   Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: Manufactured product that
           consists of water-insensitive epoxy adhesive, Portland cement, and water-based solution of
           corrosion-inhibiting chemicals that forms a protective film on steel reinforcement.

           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
                 into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

                 a.    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Emaco P24.
                 b.    Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Duralprep A.C.
                 c.    Kaufman Products, Inc.; Surepoxy HM EPL.
                 d.    Sika Corporation, Construction Product Division; Armatec 110 EpoCem.
                 e.    Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Bonding and Anti-Corrosion Agent.
                       .

      B.   Mortar Scrub Coat: Mix consisting of 1 part Portland cement and 1 part fine aggregate
           complying with ASTM C 144 except 100 percent passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.


2.3        PATCHING MORTAR

      A.   Patching Mortar, General:

           1.    Only use patching mortars that are recommended by manufacturer for each applicable
                 horizontal, vertical, or overhead use orientation.
           2.    Color and Aggregate Texture: Provide patching mortar and aggregates of colors and
                 sizes necessary to produce patching mortar where indicated that matches existing,
                 adjacent, exposed concrete. Blend several aggregates if necessary to achieve suitable
                 matches.
           3.    Coarse Aggregate for Patching Mortar: ASTM C 33, washed aggregate, Size No. 8,
                 Class 5S.     Add to patching-mortar mix only as permitted by patching-mortar
                 manufacturer.

      B.   Job-Mixed Patching Mortar: 1 part Portland cement and 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate complying
           with ASTM C 144, except 100 percent passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

      C.   Cementitious Patching Mortar: Packaged, dry mix for repair of concrete.

           1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
                 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
                 the following:

                 a.    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.;Emaco S88 Cl.
                 b.    Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.; Eucrete.
                 c.    Kaufman Products, Inc.; Duracrete II AG.
                 d.    Sika Corporation; Construction Product Division.; SikaRepair 222.
                 e.    Unitex.; Patch Set 928.

           2.    Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested
                 according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.


MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                    030130 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


      D.   Polymer-Modified, Cementitious Patching Mortar: Packaged, dry mix for repair of concrete
           and that contains a latex additive as either a dry powder or a separate liquid that is added during
           mixing.

           1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
                 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
                 the following:

                 a.     AQUAFIN, Inc.; Mortar-40.
                 b.     BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Emaco R310 Cl.
                 c.     Dayton Superior Corporation.; Polyfast LPL.
                 d.     Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.; Duraltop Flowable Mortar.
                 e.     Sika Corporation; Construction Product Division. ;Sika MonoTop 615.


           2.    Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa)] at 28 days when tested
                 according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.


2.4        JOINT FILLER

      A.   Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A
           Shore durometer hardness of at least 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
                 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

                 a.     BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Masterfill 300i.
                 b.     ChemCo Systems; CCS Grout, Control Joint or Control Joint - HB.
                 c.     Dayton Superior Corporation; PoxyFil (J-52).
                 d.     Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco 700 or 800]
                 e.     Kaufman Products, Inc.; Surepoxy Flexijoint.
                 f.     Metzger/McGuire; MM-80 or Edge-Pro XL.
                 g.     Sika Corporation, Construction Product Division; Sikadur 51 NS or Sikadur 51 SL.
                 h.     Unitex; Pro-Flex or Pro-Flex Gel.
                 i.     US SPEC, Division of US MIX Products Company; SR 50 - EJF.
                 j.     W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Sealtight Rezi-Weld Flex.


      B.   Polyurea Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, polyurea resin with a
           Type A Shore durometer hardness of at least 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
                 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

                 a.     ASTC Polymers; Penetron 3003.
                 b.     BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Masterfill 400 CT or TF-100.
                 c.     ChemCo Systems; CCS Grout, Control Joint or Polyurea SWL.
                 d.     Dayton Superior Corporation; Joint Fill..
                 e.     Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Qwikjoint 200.
                 f.     Metzger/McGuire; Spal-Pro RS 88 or Spal-Pro 2000.

MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                        030130 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                  01/27/2011




      C.   Color: Gray


2.5        EPOXY CRACK-INJECTION MATERIALS

      A.   Epoxy Crack-Injection Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV at structural locations and
           where indicated, Type I at other locations; free of VOCs.

           1.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
                 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
                 the following:

                 a.      BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.; Concresive Standard LVI.
                 b.      Dayton Superior Corporation.; Sure-Inject
                 c.      Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.; Flexocrete.
                 d.      Kaufman Products, Inc.; SurePoxy HMSLV
                 e.      Sika Corporation; Construction Product Division.; Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV


           2.    Capping Adhesive: Product manufactured for use with crack injection adhesive by same
                 manufacturer.
           3.    Color: Provide epoxy crack-injection adhesive and capping adhesive that will blend
                 with existing, adjacent concrete and will not stain concrete surface


2.6        OTHER MATERIALS

      A.   Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatment: Waterborne solution of alkaline corrosion-inhibiting chemicals
           for concrete-surface application that penetrates concrete by diffusion and forms a protective
           film on steel reinforcement.

           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
                 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

                 a.      Cortec Corporation; MCI 2020 Series.
                 b.      Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Duralprep 3020.
                 c.      Evonik Degussa Corporation; Protectosil CIT.
                 d.      Fox Industries, Inc.; FX-361 Migratory Corrosion Inhibitor.
                 e.      Sika Corporation, Construction Product Division; Sika FerroGard 903.
                 f.      Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Migratory Corrosion Inhibitor
                         CR247.


      B.   Polymer Sealer: Low-viscosity epoxy or high-molecular-weight methacrylate penetrating sealer
           and crack filler recommended by manufacturer for penetrating and sealing cracks in exterior
           concrete traffic surfaces; VOC content 100 g/L or less .

           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
                 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                    030130 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


                 a.     Epoxy Sealers:

                        1)    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; EpoXeal GS.
                        2)    ChemCo Systems; Epoxy Healer Sealer.
                        3)    Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco #512 VOC
                              Epoxy Sealer
                        4)    Sika Corporation, Construction Product Division; Sikadur 55 SLV.
                        5)    Unitex; Pro-Poxy 50-1.
                        6)    US SPEC, Division of US MIX Products Company; Eposeal LVS.


                 b.     High-Molecular-Weight Methacrylate Sealers:

                        1)    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Degadeck Crack Sealer
                              Plus.
                        2)    Castek, Inc., Subsidiary of Transpo Industries, Inc.; Sealate T70.
                        3)    Kwik Bond Polymers; KBP 204.
                        4)    Sika Corporation, Construction Product Division; SikaPron

           2.    Color: As selected by owner from full range of industry colors.


      C.   Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or III unless otherwise indicated.


2.7        MIXES

      A.   General: Mix products, in clean containers, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

           1.    Do not add water, thinners, or additives unless recommended by manufacturer.
           2.    When practical, use manufacturer's premeasured packages to ensure that materials are
                 mixed in proper proportions. When premeasured packages are not used, measure
                 ingredients using graduated measuring containers; do not estimate quantities or use
                 shovel or trowel as unit of measure.
           3.    Do not mix more materials than can be used within time limits recommended by
                 manufacturer. Discard materials that have begun to set.

      B.   Mortar Scrub Coat: Mix dry ingredients with enough water to provide consistency of thick
           cream.

      C.   Dry-Pack Mortar: Mix patching-mortar dry ingredients with just enough liquid to form damp
           cohesive mixture that can be squeezed by hand into a ball but is not plastic.

      D.   Concrete: Comply with Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete

      E.   Grout for Use with Preplaced Aggregate: Proportion according to ASTM C 938. Add grout
           fluidifier to mixing water followed by Portland cement, pozzolan, and fine aggregate.




MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                      030130 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        EXAMINATION

      A.   Notify Project Manager seven days in advance of dates when areas of deteriorated or
           delaminated concrete and deteriorated reinforcing bars will be located.

      B.   Locate areas of deteriorated or delaminated concrete using hammer or chain drag sounding and
           mark boundaries. Mark areas for removal by simplifying and squaring off boundaries as
           directed by Project Manager. At columns and walls make boundaries level and plumb, unless
           otherwise indicated.

      C.   Pacmometer Testing: Locate at least three reinforcing bars using a pachometer, and drill test
           holes to determine depth of cover. Calibrate pachometer using depth of cover measurements,
           and verify depth of cover in removal areas using pachometer

      D.   Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from concrete-maintenance
           work.


3.2        PREPARATION

      A.   Ensure that supervisory personnel are on-site and on duty when concrete maintenance work
           begins and during its progress.

      B.   Preparation for Removal of Deteriorated Concrete: Examine construction to be repaired to
           determine best methods to safely and effectively perform concrete maintenance work. Examine
           adjacent work to determine what protective measures will be necessary. Make explorations,
           probes, and inquiries as necessary to determine condition of construction to be removed in the
           course of repair.

           1.    Verify that affected utilities have been disconnected and capped.
           2.    Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed for reinstallation or salvage.
           3.    Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and temporary structural supports as required to
                 preserve stability and prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement, settlement, or
                 collapse of construction being demolished and construction and finishes to remain.

      C.   Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site,
           plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from concrete maintenance work.

           1.    Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and
                 precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and
                 adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.
           2.    Use only proven protection methods appropriate to each area and surface being protected.
           3.    Provide barricades, barriers, and temporary directional signage to exclude public from
                 areas where concrete maintenance work is being performed.
           4.    Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and
                 vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of concrete
                 maintenance work.



MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                     030130 - 9
KPFF Job # 208586.11        City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


        5.    Contain dust and debris generated by concrete maintenance work and prevent it from
              reaching the public or adjacent surfaces.
        6.    Use water-mist sprinkling and other wet methods to control dust only with adequate,
              approved procedures and equipment that ensure that such water will not create a hazard
              or adversely affect other building areas or materials.
        7.    Protect floors and other surfaces along haul routes from damage, wear, and staining.
        8.    Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate removal and dismantling work
              from other areas of the building.
        9.    Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment by covering them with heavy polyethylene film
              and waterproof masking tape or a liquid strippable masking agent. If practical, remove
              items, store, and reinstall after potentially damaging operations are complete.
        10.   Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property.
        11.   Dispose of debris and runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that
              prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping,
              and water penetration into building interiors. Comply with requirements of jurisdiction
              having authority.

  D.    Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is
        functioning properly. Notify Project Manager immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage.
        Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is in working order.

        1.    Prevent solids such as aggregate or mortar residue from entering the drainage system.
              Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other
              materials resulting from concrete maintenance work.
        2.    Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean
              water to pass.

  E.    Concrete Removal:

        1.    Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Strengthen or add new supports
              when required during progress of removal work. Do not overload structural elements
              with debris.
        2.    Saw-cut perimeter of areas indicated for removal to a depth of at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) .
              Make cuts perpendicular to concrete surfaces and no deeper than cover on reinforcement.
        3.    Remove deteriorated and delaminated concrete by breaking up and dislodging from
              reinforcement.
        4.    Remove additional concrete if necessary to provide a depth of removal of at least [1/2
              inch (13 mm)] over entire removal area.
        5.    Where half or more of the perimeter of reinforcing bar is exposed, bond between
              reinforcing bar and surrounding concrete is broken, or reinforcing bar is corroded,
              remove concrete from entire perimeter of bar and to provide at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
              clearance around bar.
        6.    Test areas where concrete has been removed by tapping with hammer, and remove
              additional concrete until unsound and disbonded concrete is completely removed.
        7.    Provide surfaces with a fractured profile of at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) that are
              approximately perpendicular or parallel to original concrete surfaces. At columns and
              walls, make top and bottom surfaces level unless otherwise directed.
        8.    Thoroughly clean removal areas of loose concrete, dust, and debris.

  F.    Reinforcing-Bar Preparation: Remove loose and flaking rust from reinforcing bars by needle
        scaling or wire brushing until only tightly adhered light rust remains.

MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                   030130 - 10
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


           1.    Where section loss of reinforcing bar is more than 25 percent, or 20 percent in two or
                 more adjacent bars, cut bars and remove and replace as directed by Project Manager.
                 Remove additional concrete as necessary to provide at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance
                 at existing and replacement bars. Splice replacement bars to existing bars according to
                 ACI 318 (ACI 318M) by lapping, welding, or using mechanical couplings.

      G.   Preparation of Floor Joints for Repair: Saw-cut joints full width to edges and depth of spalls,
           but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep. Clean out debris and loose concrete; vacuum or blow
           clear with compressed air.

      H.   Surface Preparation for Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatment: Clean concrete to remove dirt, oils,
           films, and other materials detrimental to treatment application.

           1.    Use low-pressure water cleaning, detergent scrubbing, or sand blasting .
           2.    Allow surface to dry before applying corrosion-inhibiting treatment.

      I.   Surface Preparation for Overlays:

           1.    Remove delaminated material and deteriorated concrete surface material.
           2.    Roughen surface of concrete to produce a surface profile as required by required by
                 overlay manufacturer.
           3.    Use sand blasting, shot blasting, scarifying, needle scaling, high-pressure water jetting,
                 scabbling, or milling.
           4.    Sweep and vacuum roughened surface to remove debris followed by low-pressure water
                 cleaning.

      J.   Surface Preparation for Sealers: Acid etch surface of concrete to produce a surface profile
           matching CSP 1 according to ICRI 03732. Prepare surface for acid etching by detergent
           scrubbing to remove oils and films that may prevent acid penetration.

           1.    Remove excess acid solution, reaction products, and debris by squeegeeing or
                 vacuuming.
           2.    Scrub surface with an alkaline detergent, rinse, and squeegee or vacuum.
           3.    Check acidity of surface with pH test paper and continue rinsing until pH is acceptable to
                 written requirements of sealer manufacturer.
           4.    When pH is acceptable to written requirements of sealer manufacturer and surface is
                 clean, vacuum dry.

      K.   Surface Preparation for Sealers: Clean concrete to remove dirt, oils, films, and other materials
           detrimental to sealer application.

           1.    Use shot blasting, low-pressure water cleaning, or detergent scrubbing.


3.3        APPLICATION

      A.   General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for application
           of products, including surface preparation.

      B.   Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: Apply to reinforcing bars
           and concrete by stiff brush or hopper spray according to manufacturer's written instructions.


MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                       030130 - 11
KPFF Job # 208586.11        City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


        Apply to reinforcing bars in two coats, allowing first coat to dry two to three hours before
        applying second coat. Allow to dry before placing patching mortar or concrete.

  C.    Epoxy Bonding Agent: Apply to reinforcing bars and concrete by brush, roller, or spray
        according to manufacturer's written instructions, leaving no pinholes or other uncoated areas.
        Apply to reinforcing bars in at least two coats, allowing first coat to dry before applying second
        coat. ]Place mortar or concrete while epoxy is still tacky. If epoxy dries, recoat before placing
        patching mortar or concrete.

  D.    Mortar Scrub Coat for Job-Mixed Patching Mortar and Concrete: Dampen repair area and
        surrounding concrete 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repair area. Remove standing water and apply
        scrub coat with a brush, scrubbing it into surface and thoroughly coating repair area. If scrub
        coat dries, recoat before placing patching mortar or concrete.

  E.    Slurry Coat for Cementitious Patching Mortar: Wet substrate thoroughly and then remove
        standing water. Scrub a slurry of neat patching mortar into substrate, filling pores and voids.

  F.    Placing Patching Mortar:     Place as follows unless otherwise recommended in writing by
        manufacturer:

        1.    Provide forms where necessary to confine patch to required shape.
        2.    Wet substrate and forms thoroughly and then remove standing water.
        3.    Pretreatment: Apply specified bonding agent or mortar scrub coat General Placement:
              Place patching mortar by troweling toward edges of patch to force intimate contact with
              edge surfaces. For large patches, fill edges first and then work toward center, always
              troweling toward edges of patch. At fully exposed reinforcing bars, force patching
              mortar to fill space behind bars by compacting with trowel from sides of bars.
        4.    Vertical Patching: Place material in lifts of not more than 1 inch (25 mm) Do not feather
              edge.
        5.    Overhead Patching: Place material in lifts of not more than 1 inch (25 mm) Do not
              feather edge.
        6.    Consolidation: After each lift is placed, consolidate material and screed surface.
        7.    Multiple Lifts: Where multiple lifts are used, score surface of lifts to provide a rough
              surface for placing subsequent lifts. Allow each lift to reach final set before placing
              subsequent lifts.
        8.    Finishing: Allow surfaces of lifts that are to remain exposed to become firm and then
              finish to a smooth surface with a wood or sponge float.
        9.    Curing:      Wet-cure cementitious patching materials, including polymer-modified
              cementitious patching materials, for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-
              saturated absorptive cover.

  G.    Dry-Pack Mortar: Use for deep cavities.Place as follows unless otherwise recommended in
        writing by manufacturer:

        1.    Provide forms where necessary to confine patch to required shape.
        2.    Wet substrate and forms thoroughly and then remove standing water.
        3.    Pretreatment: Apply specified bonding agent or mortar scrub coat Place dry-pack mortar
              into cavity by hand, and compact tightly into place. Do not place more material at a time
              than can be properly compacted. Continue placing and compacting until patch is
              approximately level with surrounding surface.


MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                    030130 - 12
KPFF Job # 208586.11       City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


        4.    After cavity is filled and patch is compacted, trowel surface to match profile and finish of
              surrounding concrete. A thin coat of patching mortar may be troweled into the surface of
              patch to help obtain required finish.
        5.    Wet-cure patch for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated
              absorptive cover.

  H.    Concrete: Place according to Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete " and as follows:

        1.    Pretreatment: Apply epoxy bonding agent to reinforcement and concrete substrate.
        2.    Standard Placement:

              a.     Use vibrators to consolidate concrete as it is placed.
              b.     At unformed surfaces, screed concrete to produce a surface that when finished with
                     patching mortar will match required profile and surrounding concrete.

        3.    Form-and-Pump Placement: Place concrete by form and pump method.

              a.     Design and construct forms to resist pumping pressure in addition to weight of wet
                     concrete. Seal joints and seams in forms and where forms abut existing concrete.
              b.     Pump concrete into place from bottom to top, releasing air from forms as concrete
                     is introduced. When formed space is full, close air vents and pressurize to 14 psi
                     (96 kPa).

        4.    Wet-cure concrete for not less than seven days by leaving forms in place or keeping
              surfaces continuously wet by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.
        5.    Fill placement cavities with dry-pack mortar and repair voids with patching mortar.
              Finish to match surrounding concrete.

  I.    Floor-Joint Repair: Cut out deteriorated concrete as indicated on Drawings. Install joint filler
        in nonmoving floor joints where indicated and as follows:

        1.    Depth: Install joint filler to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) Use fine silica sand no
              more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep to close base of joint. Do not use sealant backer rods or
              compressible fillers below joint filler.
        2.    Top Surface: Install joint filler so that when cured, it is flush at top surface of adjacent
              concrete. If necessary, overfill joint and remove excess when filler has cured.

  J.    Epoxy Crack Injection:

        1.    Clean areas to receive capping adhesive of oil, dirt, and other substances that would
              interfere with bond, and clean cracks with oil-free compressed air or low-pressure water
              to remove loose particles.
        2.    Place injection ports as recommended by epoxy manufacturer, spacing no farther apart
              than thickness of member being injected. Seal injection ports in place with capping
              adhesive.
        3.    Seal cracks at exposed surfaces with a ribbon of capping adhesive at least 1/4 inch (6
              mm) thick by 1 inch (25 mm) wider than crack.
        4.    Inject cracks wider than 0.02 inch (0.50 mm) to a depth of 8 inches (200 mm) and to a
              width of less than 0.002 inch (0.50 mm).




MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                    030130 - 13
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


           5.    Inject epoxy adhesive, beginning at widest part of crack and working toward narrower
                 parts. Inject adhesive into ports to refusal, capping adjacent ports when they extrude
                 epoxy. Cap injected ports and inject through adjacent ports until crack is filled.
           6.    After epoxy adhesive has set, remove injection ports and grind surfaces smooth.

      K.   Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatment: Apply by brush, roller, or airless spray in two coats at
           manufacturer's recommended application rate. Remove film of excess treatment by high-
           pressure washing before patching treated concrete

      L.   Polymer Sealer:     Apply by brush, roller, or airless spray at manufacturer's recommended
           application rate.

           1.    Apply to traffic-bearing surfaces, including parking areas and walks.


3.4        FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.   Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

      B.   Perform the following tests and inspections:

           1.    Packaged, Cementitious Patching Mortar: 3 randomly selected sets of samples for each
                 type of mortar required, tested according to ASTM C 928.
           2.    Job-Mixed Patching Mortar: 3 randomly selected sets of samples for each type of mortar
                 required, tested for compressive strength according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
           3.    Concrete: As specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete .
           4.    Grouted Preplaced Aggregate: Tested for compressive strength of grout according to
                 ASTM C 942.

                 a.     Testing Frequency: One sample for each 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of grout or fraction
                        thereof, but not less than one sample for each day's work.

           5.    Joint Filler: Core-drilled samples to verify proper installation.

                 a.     Testing Frequency: One sample for each 100 feet (30 m) of joint filled.
                 b.     Where samples are taken, refill holes with joint filler.

           6.    Epoxy Crack Injection: Core-drilled samples to verify proper installation.

                 a.     Testing Frequency: 1 sample for each 100 feet (30 m) of crack injected.
                 b.     Where samples are taken, refill holes with epoxy mortar.

      C.   Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

      D.   Prepare test and inspection reports.


END OF SECTION 030130




MAINTENANCE OF CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE                                                          030130 - 14
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011



SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE




PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
           materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes for the following:

           1.    Suspended slabs.
           2.    Concrete toppings.

      B.   Related Sections include the following:

           1.    Division 03 Section 034500 “Precast Architectural Concrete” for general building
                 applications of precast stairs.


1.3        DEFINITIONS

      A.   Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
           following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-
           furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.


1.4        SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

      B.   Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
           characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
           warrant adjustments.
           1.    Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
           2.    Include substantiating substantial test data to show compliance with ACI 318 Chapter 5.

      C.   Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
           placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
           diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
           and supports for concrete reinforcement. The steel reinforcement detailer shall generate all shop
           drawing bending and installation details from the structural and architectural drawings and


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                           033000 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                      01/27/2011


           specifications. The use of reproductions or photocopies of the contract drawings shall not be
           permitted.
           1.     Provide details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315,
                  "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include special reinforcement
                  required for openings through concrete structures.
           2.     Shop drawing re-submittals shall clearly identify all revisions to previous submittals.
                  a.     Heavy ink clouded outlines (revision clouds) shall be drawn around revised areas
                         of individual sheets.
                  b.     Project Manager/Engineer of Record will not review information outside of
                         revision clouds on resubmitted drawings.

      D.   Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a structural engineer
           licensed in the State of Idaho detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

           1.    Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
                 shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.

      E.   Welding certificates.

      F.   Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer.
           1.    Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in Article 033001.5 “Quality
                 Assurance” to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed
                 projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and
                 Owners, and other information specified.

      G.   Material Certificates:   For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

           1.    Cementitious materials
           2.    Admixtures.
           3.    Form materials and form-release agents.
           4.    Steel reinforcement and accessories.
           5.    Fiber reinforcement.
           6.    Curing compounds.
           7.    Slab treatments.
           8.    Bonding agents.
           9.    Adhesives.
           10.   Semirigid joint filler.
           11.   Repair materials.


      H.   Minutes of preinstallation conference.


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as
           ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and supervisor who is an ACI-certified
           Concrete Flatwork Technician.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                           033000 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11       City Centre Stair Replacement Project                   01/27/2011


  B.    Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
        products and that complies with ASTM 94/C94M requirements for production facilities and
        equipment.

        1.    Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
              Production Facilities.

  C.    Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
        jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as
        documented according to ASTM E 548.

        1.    Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
              Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

        2.    Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
              Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade 1. Testing Agency
              laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician –
              Grade II.

  D.    Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
        the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through
        one source from a single manufacturer.

  E.    Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding
        Code--Reinforcing Steel."

  F.    ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
        Documents:

        1.    ACI 301, Sections 1 through 5.
        2.    ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

  G.    Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
        evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

  H.    Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
        Division 1 Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination.”
        1.    Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
              procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
              entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
              a.      Contractor’s superintendent.
              b.      Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
              c.      Ready mix concrete manufacturer.
              d.      Concrete subcontractor.
        2.    Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
              control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
              curing procedures, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring
              and reshoring procedures, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel
              reinforcement installation, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                      033000 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


1.6        DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.   Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

      B.   Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
           contaminants.


1.7        SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

      A.   Redesign or Departures from Requirements of the Contract Documents Initiated by Contractor:
           1.    Obtain written acceptance from the Project Manager.
           2.    Bear costs for Contractor-initiated or construction error due to changes in type, form,
                 system, or details of construction from those indicated by the contract documents.
           3.    Costs of review of such changes by Project Manager will be deducted from the Contract
                 Sum by Change Order.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MANUFACTURERS

      A.   In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
           product selection.
           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
                 specified.
           2.    Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
                 manufacturers specified.


2.2        FORM-FACING MATERIALS

      A.   Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
           smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
           1.   Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
                and as follows:
                a.    Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge
                      sealed.

      B.   Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
           stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
           concrete surfaces.
           1.     Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.


2.3        STEEL REINFORCEMENT

      A.   Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

      B.   Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars:       All reinforcing steel to be welded or bent in field:
           ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                           033000 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


      C.   Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
           wire into flat sheets.


2.4        REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

      A.   Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
           reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
           wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" of greater
           compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
           1.     For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
                  CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.


2.5        CONCRETE MATERIALS


      A.   Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
           source, throughout Project:
           1.    Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, gray.
                 a.     Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
                 b.     Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

      B.   Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

      C.   Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
           aggregates from a single source.
           1.    Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
           2.    Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than
                 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less
                 than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm) sieve, and less
                 than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3 mm).

      D.   Water: ASTM C 94/C94-M and potable.


2.6        ADMIXTURES

      A.   Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

      B.   Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
           other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
           permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
           chloride.
           1.     Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
           2.     Retarding Admixure: ASTM C 494/ C494M, Type B.
           3.     Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C 494M, Type D.
           4.     High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.
           5.     High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C 494M, Type G.
           6.     Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                           033000 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                  01/27/2011


      C.   Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor
           or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
           chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM
           C494/C494M, Type C.
           1.     Products:

                 a.    Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI.
                 b.    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI.
                 c.    Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN.
                 d.    Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucon, CIA.
                 e.    Grace Construction Products, W.R. Grace & Co.; DCI.
                 f.    Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete CNI.
                 g.    Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.

      D.   Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-
           accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
           protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
           1.    Products:

                 a.    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+.
                 b.    Axim Concrete Technologies; Catexol 1000CI.
                 c.    Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN2.
                 d.    Cortec Corporation; MCI [2000] [2005NS].
                 e.    Grace Construction Products, W.R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S.
                 f.    Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete 222+
                 g.    Sika Corporation; FerroGard-901.


2.7        FIBER REINFORCEMENT

      A.   Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Polyolefin macro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete,
           complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1 to 2-1/4 inches (25 to 57 mm) long.

           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

                 a.    3M; Scotchcast Polyolefin Fibers.
                 b.    Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Tuf-Strand SF.
                 c.    FORTA Corporation; FORTA FERRO.
                 d.    Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Strux 90/40.
                 e.    Nycon, Inc.; XL.
                 f.    Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 650.
                 g.    Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber.


2.8        CURING MATERIALS

      A.   Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
           to fresh concrete.
           1.     Products:
                  a.    Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm.
                  b.    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                        033000 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11      City Centre Stair Replacement Project              01/27/2011


              c.    Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm
              d.    ChemMasters; Spray-Film
              e.    Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;
                    Aquafilm.
              f.    Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.
              g.    Euclid Chemical Company (the); Eucobar.
              h.    Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.
              i.    Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.
              j.    L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.
              k.    MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm.
              l.    Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.
              m.    Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
              n.    Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm.
              o.    Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.
              p.    Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid.
              q.    TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
              r.    Unitex; Pro-Film.
              s.    Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.

  B.    Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
        approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

  C.    Moisture-Retaining Cover:   ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
        sheet.

  D.    Water: Potable.

  E.    Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
        Class B, dissipating.
        1.     Products:

              a.    Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.
              b.    BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.
              c.    ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
              d.    Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.
              e.    Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).
              f.    Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.
              g.    Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX;
                    TAMMSCURE WB 30C.
              h.    Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.
              i.    Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.
              j.    L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
              k.    Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.
              l.    Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.
              m.    Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.
              n.    SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.
              o.    Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.
              p.    TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.
              q.    Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                               033000 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


2.9        RELATED MATERIALS

      A.   Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, per ASTM D 2240.

      B.   Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
           and bonding to damp surfaces, of class, suitable for application temperature and grade to suit
           requirements, and as follows:
           1.    Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
                 hardened concrete.


2.10       CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

      A.   Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
           laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 and in accordance with
           the following:
           1.     Compressive Strength: Refer to General Structural Notes.
           2.     Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Refer to General Structural Notes.
           3.     Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in
                  concrete at point of placement having the air content specified in the General Structural
                  Notes.

      B.   Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
           Portland cement in concrete as follows:
           1.    Fly Ash: 20 percent.
           2.    Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 20 percent.
           3.    Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
           4.    Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
                 Portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 20 percent.
           5.    Silica Fume: 10 percent.
           6.    Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 30 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not
                 exceeding 20 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
           7.    Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica
                 Fume: 50 percent Portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 20
                 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

      C.   Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
           cement.

      D.   Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but
           not less than 3 lb/cu. yd. (1.8 kg/cu. m).

      E.   Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

           1.    Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture, or high-range
                 water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and
                 workability.
           2.    Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
                 humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                           033000 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


           3.    Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
                 slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
                 water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
           4.    Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated.


2.11       FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

      A.   Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."


2.12       CONCRETE MIXING

      A.   Ready-Mixed Concrete:       Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
           ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information
           1.   When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
                delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
                deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        FORMWORK

      A.   Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
           lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete
           structure can support such loads.

      B.   Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
           elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

      C.   Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

           1.    Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

      D.   Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

      E.   Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
           Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
           top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
           1.     Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
           2.     Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

      F.   Set edge forms to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide
           and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

      G.   Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
           is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
           prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
           locations.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                           033000 - 9
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


      H.   Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

      I.   Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
           required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

      J.   Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
           other debris just before placing concrete.

      K.   Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
           maintain proper alignment.

      L.   Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
           instructions, before placing reinforcement.


3.2        EMBEDDED ITEMS

      A.   Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
           is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
           diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
           1.     Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
                  tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
                  Bridges."
           2.     Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
                  of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
                  other conditions.
           3.     Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.


3.3        REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

      A.   General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that
           does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than
           50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete if concrete is hard enough to not be
           damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
           maintained.
           1.    Leave formwork for slabs that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has
                 achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.
           2.    Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
                 loosening or disturbing shores.

      B.   Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
           otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
           new form-release agent.

      C.   When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
           Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
           surfaces unless approved by Project Manager.


3.4        SHORES AND RESHORES



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                           033000 - 10
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


      A.   Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of
           shoring and reshoring.
           1.    Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

      B.   In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to
           distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
           induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

      C.   Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
           provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.


3.5        STEEL REINFORCEMENT

      A.   General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

           1.    Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
                 placing concrete.

      B.   Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
           would reduce bond to concrete.

      C.   Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
           support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
           weld crossing reinforcing bars.

           1.     Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

      D.   Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

      E.   Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
           sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of
           adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.


3.6        JOINTS

      A.   General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.


3.7        CONCRETE PLACEMENT

      A.   Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
           items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

      B.   Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless
           approved by Project Manager.
           1.    Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.

      C.   Adjust mix as required to maintain specified air content at the point of discharge.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                             033000 - 11
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


      D.   Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
           concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
           weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
           Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
           1.    Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
                 and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
           2.    Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
           3.    Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
                 vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
                 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
                 concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration
                 to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
                 other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

      E.   Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
           construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
           1.    Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
                 around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
           2.    Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
           3.    Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
           4.    Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
           5.    Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
                 surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
                 slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

      F.   Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
           physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
           temperatures.
           1.    When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
                 for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
                 temperature range required by ACI 301.
           2.    Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
                 on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
           3.    Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
                 chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

      G.   Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
           1.   Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
                mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
                equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
                cool concrete is Contractor's option.
           2.   Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
                subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.


3.8        FINISHING FORMED SURFACES



      A.   Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
           an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                         033000 - 12
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                     01/27/2011


           defects. Remove fins and other projectionsthat exceed specified limits on formed-surface
           irregularities.

           1.    Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or
                 covering material applied directly to concrete.


3.9        FINISHING SLABS

      A.   General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
           finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

      B.   Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
           floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of ¼ inch
           (6mm) in one direction.

           1.    Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor
                 topping or mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

      C.   Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
           or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
           Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
           texture.

           1.    Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to be
                 covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or
                 sand-bed terrazzo.


3.10       MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

      A.   Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,
           after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with
           in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
           complete the Work.


3.11       CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

      A.   General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
           temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations
           in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

      B.   Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
           windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
           during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
           placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

      C.   Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
           slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
           loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
           remainder of the curing period.


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                          033000 - 13
KPFF Job # 208586.11         City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


  D.    Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
        surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

  E.    Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 by one or a combination of the following methods:

        1.    Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
              following materials:

              a.     Water.
              b.     Continuous water-fog spray.
              c.     Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
                     surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

        2.    Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
              cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
              at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
              than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
              material and waterproof tape.

              a.     Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
                     floor coverings.
              b.     Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
                     penetrating liquid floor treatments.
              c.     Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
                     cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
                     bonding of a floor covering used on Project.


3.12    JOINT FILLING

  A.    Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

        1.    Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until
              construction traffic has permanently ceased.

  B.    Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
        faces of joint clean and dry.

  C.    Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 1 inch (25 mm) deep
        in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.


3.13    CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

  A.    Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Project Manager.
        Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Project Manager's
        approval.

  B.    Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two
        and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
        for handling and placing.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                          033000 - 14
KPFF Job # 208586.11        City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


  C.    Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
        spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
        stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
        1.     Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
               1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in
               depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
               and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
               mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone
               plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
        2.     Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and
               standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
               color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
               before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
               than surrounding surface.
        3.     Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
               structural performance as determined by Project Manager.

  D.    Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
        verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
        sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
        1.     Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
               honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
               that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
               width, and other objectionable conditions.
        2.     After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
        3.     Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
               operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
               areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
        4.     Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
               Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
               written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
               edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
        5.     Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
               areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
               floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
               manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
               surface.
        6.     Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
               diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
               clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm)
               clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
               apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
               concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
               adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
        7.     Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
               mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
               and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
               patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
               match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                      033000 - 15
KPFF Job # 208586.11        City Centre Stair Replacement Project                   01/27/2011


  E.    Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Project Manager's approval, using epoxy
        adhesive and patching mortar.

  F.    Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Project Manager's
        approval.


3.14    FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

  A.    Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and
        inspections and prepare test reports.

  B.    Inspections: As indicated in the General Structural Notes.

  C.    Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
        ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
        1.   Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
             mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
             each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
        2.   Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
             but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
             additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
        3.   Air Content:        ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;
             ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test
             for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
             mixture.
        4.   Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
             40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
             for each composite sample.
        5.   Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
             for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
             mixture.
        6.   Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
             a.     Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
                    composite sample.

              b.     Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
                     sample.

        7.    Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one laboratory-cured specimen at
              7 days, two at 28 days, and hold one for later testing.
              a.     Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
                     at 28 days.
              b.     A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
                     two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
        8.    When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
              cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
              for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
        9.    Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
              consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                     033000 - 16
KPFF Job # 208586.11       City Centre Stair Replacement Project                    01/27/2011


              and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
              more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
        10.   Test results shall be reported in writing to Project Manager, concrete manufacturer,
              Building Official, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-
              strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete
              placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in
              Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and
              materials, compressive breaking strength, type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests, and
              air content.
        11.   Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
              be permitted by Project Manager but will not be used as sole basis for approval or
              rejection of concrete.
        12.   Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
              when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
              requirements have not been met, as directed by Project Manager. Testing and inspecting
              agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
              complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Project Manager.
        13.   Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
              compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
        14.   Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
              with the Contract Documents.

  D.    Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)
        within 48 hours of finishing.

                                      END OF SECTION 033000




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE                                                                     033000 - 17
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011



SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   This Section includes the following:

           1.    Architectural precast concrete stair stringers and intermediate landings.

      B.   Related Sections include the following:

           1.    Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for installing connection anchors in
                 concrete.
           2.    Division 05 Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes.


1.3        DEFINITION

      A.   Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and
           texture, preapproved by Project Manager and Owner.



1.4        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

      B.   Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-
           absorption tests.

      C.   Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.
           Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit.
           Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at
           building corners.

           1.    Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses.
           2.    Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and cast-in
                 hardware and connections.
           3.    Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or
                 attached to structure or other construction.
           4.    Indicate locations, extent, and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is proposed.



PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                 034500 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


           5.    Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special
                 conditions.
           6.    Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark
                 placed on panel.
           7.    Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials.
           8.    Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance
                 requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do
                 not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying
                 details or materials and maintain the general design concept.
           9.    Comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by the qualified professional
                 engineer responsible for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections, and
                 types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Indicate location, type,
                 magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from
                 architectural precast concrete.

      D.   Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete
           units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected;
           approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).

           1.    When other faces of precast concrete unit are exposed, include Samples illustrating
                 workmanship, color, and texture of backup concrete as well as facing concrete.


1.5        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency.

      B.   Welding certificates.

      C.   Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers:

           1.    Cementitious materials.
           2.    Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.
           3.    Admixtures.
           4.    Bearing pads.
           5.    Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.

      D.   Material Test Reports: For aggregates.

      E.   Source quality-control test reports.

      F.   Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.


1.6        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate
           of Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load and load bearing
           members.




PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                    034500 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


      B.   Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector who has retained a "PCI-Certified Field
           Auditor" to conduct a field audit of a project in same category as this Project before erection of
           precast concrete and who can produce an Erectors' Post-Audit Declaration.

      C.   Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural
           precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes
           preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
           professional engineer.

           1.    Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant
                 for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Units or
                 participates in APA's "Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast
                 Concrete Products" and is designated an APA-certified plant.

      D.   Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
           jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

      E.   Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of
           PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types
           of architectural precast concrete units indicated.

      F.   Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-
           control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with
           PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast
           Concrete Products."

      G.   Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural
           Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

      H.   Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete
           units, produce a minimum of 2 sample stringer sections approximately 3 feet wide, with 3 treads
           and risers in area for review by Project Manager and Owner. Incorporate full-scale details of
           architectural features, finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.

           1.    Locate stringer sections where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Project
                 Manager.
           2.    Damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and
                 demonstrate adequacy of repair techniques proposed for repair of surface blemishes.
           3.    After acceptance of repair technique, maintain one sample panel at manufacturer's plant
                 and one at Project site in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
                 completed Work.
           4.    Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.

      I.   Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
           Division 01 Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


1.7        DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.   Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit
           unloading units temporarily on the ground.



PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                    034500 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


      B.   Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.

      C.   Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to
           prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.

      D.   Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.

      E.   Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid
           excessive stresses which would cause cracking or damage.

      F.   Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings.


1.8        SEQUENCING

      A.   Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other
           construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates,
           instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MANUFACTURERS

      A.   Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering products
           that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

           1.    Northwest Precast.
           2.    Central Pre-Mix Prestress Co.
           3.    Knife River.
           4.    Coreslab Structures, Inc.
           5.    Arcis.

2.2        MOLD MATERIALS


      A.   Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will
           provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated;
           nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.

           1.    Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond
                 with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
                 surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.

      B.   Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of
           newly placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.


2.3        REINFORCING MATERIALS

      A.   Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.


PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                      034500 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


      B.   Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

      C.   Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 934/A 934M, deformed. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing
           shall be stored off the ground, in a dry location. Repair any damage to coating prior to
           installation.

      D.   Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60
           (Grade 420), deformed bars, assembled with clips.

      E.   Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

      F.   Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
           devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement
           in place according to PCI MNL 117.


2.4        PRESTRESSING TENDONS

      A.   Prestressing Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire, low-
           relaxation strand.

           1.    Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with corrosion inhibitor passing ASTM D 1743
                 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing. Include anchorage devices and coupler
                 assemblies.


2.5        CONCRETE MATERIALS

      A.   Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.

           1.    For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same
                 type, brand, and mill source.

      B.   Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

           1.    Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent.
           2.    Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N.
           3.    Silica Fume Admixture:      ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical
                 requirement.
           4.    Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

      C.   Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse
           aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of
           exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.

           1.    Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that
                 reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.

                 a.    Gradation: Gap graded.

           2.    Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material
                 as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Project Manager.


PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                  034500 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


      D.   Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored
           water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.

      E.   Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or
           strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.

      F.   Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
           required admixtures.

      G.   Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
           to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight
           of admixture.

           1.    Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
           2.    Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
           3.    Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
           4.    Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
           5.    High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
           6.    High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture:         ASTM C 494/C 494M,
                 Type G.
           7.    Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017 M.
           8.    Crystalline Capillary Waterproofing Admixture with corrosion inhibitor: ASTM C
                 494/C494 M, Type S.


2.6        STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS

      A.   Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

      B.   Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished,
           AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of
           PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.

      C.   High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.

      D.   Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

      E.   Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M.

      F.   Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
           carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and
           flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.

      G.   Shop-Primed Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section 099600 “High Performance Coatings”.

      H.   Field Painting: Comply with Division 9 Section 099600 “High Performance Coatings”.

      I.   Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

      J.   Hot Dipped Galvanized Embedded Items: ASTM A123.

      K.   Hot Dipped Galvanized Loose Angles and Plates: ASTM A123.


PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                   034500 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


2.7        BEARING PADS

      A.   Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as
           recommended by precast fabricator for application:

           1.    Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene
                 (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer
                 hardness of 50 to 70, ASTM D 2240, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15.5 MPa),
                 ASTM D 412.
           2.    Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented
                 synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, ASTM D 2240;
                 capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) with no cracking,
                 splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test one specimen for every
                 200 pads used in Project.
           3.    Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered
                 cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer; Type A durometer hardness of 80 to 100,
                 ASTM D 2240; complying with AASHTO's "AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor
                 Design (LRFD) Bridge Design Specifications, Division II, Section 18.10.2, or with MIL-
                 C-882E.
           4.    Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon), glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to
                 stainless or mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.
           5.    High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, nonleaching, plastic strip.


2.8        ACCESSORIES

      A.   Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories
           required to install architectural precast concrete units.

      B.   Stair Nosings: Consisting of an abrasive filler bonded and locked into channels in an extruded
           6063-T6 aluminum alloy base. Coefficient of friction 1.02 dry and .098 wet per ASTM F-609.


2.9        GROUT MATERIALS

      A.   Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
           containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing
           and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B
           and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working
           time.

      B.   Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of
           type, grade, and class to suit requirements.

      C.   Bond Breaker; Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, closed-cell
           polyethylente foam pad, nonabsorbent to liquid and gas, 1/8 inch thick Polyethylene sheet;
           ASTM D4397, 6 to 10 mils thickness.




PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                 034500 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


2.10    CONCRETE MIXTURES

  A.    Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

        1.    Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit
              metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

  B.    Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified
        precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.

  C.    Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by
        ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.

  D.    Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth
        mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods
        according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight
        concrete with the following properties:

        1.    Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.
        2.    Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40.

  E.    Water Absorption:     6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to
        PCI MNL 117.

  F.    Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
        placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.

  G.    When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to
        manufacturer's written instructions.


2.11    MOLD FABRICATION

  A.    Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures
        due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and
        detensioning operations.   Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before
        reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by
        release agent.

        1.    Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid
              backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form
              liner with form-release agent.

  B.    Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and
        dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.

        1.    Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
        2.    Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly radiused.




PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                               034500 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


2.12    FABRICATION

  A.    Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
        hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.
        Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting
        operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement
        or concrete placement.

        1.    Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to
              AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."

  B.    Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
        cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to
        supporting and adjacent construction.

  C.    Cast-in slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on
        the Contract Drawings.

  D.    Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings
        or prestressing strand without Architect's approval.

  E.    Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and
        supporting reinforcement.

        1.    Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
              destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds
              limits specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with
              coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.
        2.    Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
              concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to
              prevent exposure on finished surfaces.
        3.    Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain minimum coverage in
              accordance with ACI 318. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
              reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from
              finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
        4.    Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
              one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of
              adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

  F.    Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection
        stresses.

  G.    Prestress tendons for architectural precast concrete units by either pretensioning or post-
        tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 117.

        1.    Delay detensioning or post-tensioning of precast, prestressed architectural concrete units
              until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as
              established by test cylinders cured under same conditions as concrete.
        2.    Detension pretensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat-
              cutting tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.




PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                  034500 - 9
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


        3.    If concrete has been heat cured, detension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid
              dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.
        4.    Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc-rich, or epoxy paint to avoid
              corrosion and possible rust spots.

  H.    Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring,
        mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be
        added.

  I.    Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm)
        or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover
        specified.

  J.    Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming
        in precast concrete units.

        1.    Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.

  K.    Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating
        or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or
        entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

        1.    Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim
              Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete
              Institute Member Plants."

  L.    Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.

  M.    Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with
        permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
        permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will
        not show in finished structure.

  N.    Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat
        or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure
        units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect
        on performance or appearance of final product.

  O.    Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements,
        including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements
        in PCI MNL 117 and Project Manager's approval.


2.13    FABRICATION TOLERANCES

  A.    Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed
        edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with the following product
        tolerances:

        1.    Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Exposed to View: As follows:




PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                              034500 - 10
KPFF Job # 208586.11          City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


              a.    10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
              b.    10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), minus 3/16 inch (5 mm).
              c.    20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
              d.    Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

        2.    Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Not Exposed to View: As
              follows:

              a.    10 feet (3 m) or under, plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
              b.    10 to 20 feet (3 to 6 m), plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
              c.    20 to 40 feet (6 to 12 m), plus or minus 3/8 inch (10 mm).
              d.    Each additional 10 feet (3 m), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

        3.    Total Thickness or Flange Thickness: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        4.    Rib Thickness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        5.    Rib to Edge of Flange: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        6.    Distance between Ribs: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        7.    Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonal
              Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 72 inches (3 mm per 1830 mm) or 1/2 inch
              (13 mm) total, whichever is greater.
        8.    Length and Width of Block-outs and Openings within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch
              (6 mm).
        9.    Location and Dimension of Block-outs Hidden from View and Used for HVAC and
              Utility Penetrations: Plus or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
        10.   Dimensions of Haunches: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
        11.   Haunch Bearing Surface Deviation from Specified Plane: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        12.   Difference in Relative Position of Adjacent Haunch Bearing Surfaces from Specified
              Relative Position: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
        13.   Bowing: Plus or minus L/360, maximum 1 inch (25 mm).
        14.   Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch per 10 feet (6 mm per 3 m).
        15.   Warping: 1/16 inch per 12 inches (1.5 mm per 300 mm) of distance from nearest
              adjacent corner.
        16.   Tipping and Flushness of Plates: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
        17.   Dimensions of Architectural Features and Rustications: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

  B.    Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on Shop
        Drawings.

        1.    Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
        2.    Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
        3.    Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches (75 mm).
        4.    Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Fabric: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) where
              position has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus
              1/2 inch (13 mm).
        5.    Reinforcing Steel Extending out of Member: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of plan
              dimensions.
        6.    Tendons: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm), vertical; plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm),
              horizontal.
        7.    Location of Rustication Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        8.    Location of Opening within Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
        9.    Location of Flashing Reglets: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).


PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                034500 - 11
KPFF Job # 208586.11           City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


        10.   Location of Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        11.   Reglets for Glazing Gaskets: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
        12.   Electrical Outlets, Hose Bibs: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
        13.   Location of Bearing Surface from End of Member: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
        14.   Allowable Rotation of Plate, Channel Inserts, and Electrical Boxes: 2-degree rotation or
              1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum over the full dimension of unit.
        15.   Position of Sleeve: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
        16.   Location of Window Washer Track or Buttons: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).


2.14    FINISHES

  A.    Stringer and landing faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects.
        Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish all surfaces of
        architectural precast concrete landing and stringer units to match approved sample stringer
        sections and as follows:

        1.    PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate
              numbers indicated.
        2.    As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs.
        3.    Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Use chemical retarding agents applied to concrete forms and
              washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces
              after form removal.
        4.    Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and
              cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.
        5.    Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques,
              and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect
              hardware, connections, and insulation from acid attach.
        6.    Concrete Sealer: Spray applied, clear, low VOC.


2.15    SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

  A.    Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117
        requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6,
        "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete
        Institute Member Plants."

  B.    Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete
        fabricator's quality-control and testing methods.

        1.    Allow Owner's testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production
              equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing
              agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for
              additional testing and evaluation.

  C.    Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail to comply with
        ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements for concrete strength.

  D.    Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not
        comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing



PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                               034500 - 12
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


           agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine
           compressive strength according to ASTM C 42/C 42M.

           1.    A minimum of three representative cores will be taken from units of suspect strength,
                 from locations directed by Project Manager.
           2.    Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition.
           3.    Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if average
                 compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive
                 strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
           4.    Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to
                 Project Manager, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports will include
                 the following:

                 a.     Project identification name and number.
                 b.     Date when tests were performed.
                 c.     Name of precast concrete fabricator.
                 d.     Name of concrete testing agency.
                 e.     Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core
                        tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks,
                        corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation
                        to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.

      E.   Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with
           requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that
           has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        EXAMINATION

      A.   Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with
           requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions
           affecting performance.

      B.   Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

      C.   Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural framing
           has attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting steel or other
           structure is complete.


3.2        INSTALLATION

      A.   Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural
           precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.

      B.   Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable
           tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability,
           and alignment as units are being permanently connected.



PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                   034500 - 13
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


           1.    Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units
                 are being erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.
           2.    Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
                 progresses.
           3.    Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices
                 flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
           4.    Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch (19 mm).

      C.   Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
           otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon
           as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

      D.   Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding
           electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

           1.    Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field
                 welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.
           2.    Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum
                 fillet as specified by AWS.
           3.    Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and
                 reprime damaged painted surfaces.
           4.    Remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.

      E.   At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent
           loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

           1.    Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding
                 connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For
                 friction connections, apply specified bolt torque and check 25 percent of bolts at random
                 by calibrated torque wrench.

      F.   Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place
           until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids
           are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete
           surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove
           grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.


3.3        ERECTION TOLERANCES

      A.   Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without
           exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

      B.   Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the
           following noncumulative erection tolerances:

           1.    Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
           2.    Plan Location from Centerline of Steel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
           3.    Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

                 a.     Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).



PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                 034500 - 14
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


                 b.    Non-Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
                 c.    Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
                 d.    Non-Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

           4.    Support Elevation from Nominal Support Elevation: As follows:

                 a.    Maximum Low: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
                 b.    Maximum High: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

           5.    Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 100 Feet (30 m): 1
                 inch (25 mm).
           6.    Plumb in Any 10 Feet (3 m) of Element Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
           7.    Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
           8.    Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
           9.    Maximum Joint Taper: 3/8 inch (10 mm).
           10.   Joint Taper in 10 Feet (3 m): 1/4 inch (6 mm).
           11.   Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
           12.   Differential Bowing or Camber, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design:
                 1/4 inch (6 mm).
           13.   Opening Height between Spandrels: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).


3.4        FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

      A.   Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
           special inspections and prepare reports:

           1.    Erection of precast concrete members.

      B.   Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and nondestructive testing according to
           ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections.

      C.   Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Project
           Manager.

      D.   Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply
           with specified requirements.

      E.   Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
           compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


3.5        REPAIRS

      A.   Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Project Manager. The Project
           Manager reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.

      B.   Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
           uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between
           original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20
           feet (6 m).



PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                               034500 - 15
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


      C.   Prepare and recoat damaged shop primer.

      D.   Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop
           primer.

      E.   Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply
           with requirements.


3.6        CLEANING

      A.   Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

      B.   Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete
           surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

      C.   Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment
           to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

           1.    Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's
                 recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using
                 stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from
                 staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
           2.    Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed
                 concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.


END OF SECTION 034500




PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE                                                                  034500 - 16
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011



SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this section


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section Includes:

           1.    Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
           2.    Handrails and guardrails
           3.    Loose bearing, weld, and leveling plates.
           4.    Grout.
           5.    Gutters, drainpipes, and downspouts.

      B.   Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:


           1.    Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and headed studs
           2.    Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.


1.3        SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: For the following:
           1.   Paint products.
           2.   Grout.

      B.   Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

           1.    Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
                  Show anchorage and accessory items. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols,
                  distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each
                  weld.

           2.    Shop drawing re-submittals shall clearly identify all revisions to previous submittals.
                 a.    Heavy ink, clouded outlines (revision clouds) shall be drawn around revised areas
                       of individual sheets.
                 b.    Project Manager will not review information outside of revision clouds on
                       resubmitted drawings.

      C.   Gutter sample: For approval by owner.

  D.  Welding Certificates
METAL FABRICATIONS                                                               META            55000 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11             City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


      E.   Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the following products comply with
           requirements:
           1.    Structural steel including chemical and physical properties
           2.    Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis
           3.    Shear stud connectors
           4.    Shop primers
           5.    Nonsrhink grout

      F.   Written Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs): In accordance with AWS D1.1
           requirements for each welded joint proposed for use whether prequalified or by testing. Include
           all welding that will be performed during fabrication (shop) and installation/erection (field)
           Include the following items as applicable for the welding process:

           1.    Indicate as-detailed configuration, and the maximum and minimum fit-up configurations.
           2.    Identify specific electrode and manufacturer.
           3.    List actual values of welding parameters to be used so clear instruction is provided to
                 welders.
           4.    Steel specification(s) and grade(s) to be welded.
           5.    Thickness range of materials to be joined.
           6.    Type of joint.
           7.    Type of weld.
           8.    Size of weld.
           9.    Position of welding.
           10.   Flux and shielding gas.

      G.   Manufacturer’s Certifications: For all welding electrodes, fluxes, and shielding gasses to be
           used. Certifications shall satisfy the applicable AWS A5 requirements.

      H.   Test Reports: Copies of reports of tests conducted on shop and field bolted and welded
           connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results.

      I.   Surveys: Submit certified copies of each survey conducted by a registered land surveyor,
           showing elevations and locations of embedded plates in the existing structure to be used for
           attachment of weld plates and structural steel.


1.4        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for
           Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

      B.   Verification of High Performance Coating Application: Owner shall retain NACE or SSPC
           certified special inspector to verify the following:
           1.     Mixture and thinning of primer and coating
           2.     Surface preparation of shop primed embedments and members.
           3.     Verification of substrate preparation prior to primer application.
           4.     Inspect primer in field prior at time of receiving shop primed elements.
           5.     Observe touch up procedures for welded items or damaged areas.




METAL FABRICATIONS                                                            META            55000 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


      C.   Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and qualify procedures and personnel
           according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code-Steel”, and ASW D1.8, “Structural Welding
           Code – Seismic Supplement” for members part of the SLRS.

           1.    Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
                 welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
           2.    Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding personnel in accordance with AWS
                 D1.1, "Qualification," (or approved equal).
                 a.    Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and
                       joint configuration.
                 b.    Welders who have not used the welding process for a period of 6 or more months
                       shall be recertified.
                 c.    If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's
                       responsibility.
                 d.    WPSs for each joint type shall indicate proper AWS qualification and be available
                       where welding is performed.
                 e.    Each welder performing demand critical welds shall be qualified by testing in
                       accordance with AWS D1.8 Part 5.
                 f.    Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before performing
                       further welding.

      D.   Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
           Division 1 Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


1.5        DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

      A.   Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
           ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
           members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

           1.    Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
                 overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
                 structures as directed.

      B.   Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

           1.    Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
                 repackaging and seals containers.
           2.    Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
           3.    Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
                 ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.


1.6        COORDINATION

      A.   Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
           and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
           compatible with one another.



METAL FABRICATIONS                                                                META            55000 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


      B.   Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
           without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
           directions for installation.

      C.   Coordinate requirements of coatings manufacturer with shop priming and field painting.


1.7        EXCEPTIONS TO AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS
           AND BRIDGES

      A.   Add the following paragraph to Section 1.8.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
           Buildings and Bridges:

           “The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for site safety. The Fabricator and Erector shall
           review the Contract Documents and if the structure, as shown on those documents, is in conflict
           with the requirements of any safety regulations, the Fabricator shall notify the Structural Engi-
           neer of Record prior to commencing shop drawing production. If the Fabricator and/or Erector
           fail to notify the Structural Engineer of Record, as stated above, they shall become responsible
           for all costs for correcting such conflicts with the requirements of any and all safety regula-
           tions.”

      B.   Add the following paragraph to Sections 7.5.1 AND Section 7.5.3 of the AISC Code of
           Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges:

           “The Owner’s Designated Representative for Construction shall prepare the Embedment Draw-
           ing. The Embedment Drawing shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer of Record for in-
           formation only. The Structural Engineer of Record shall not be responsible for the review and
           approval of the Embedment Drawing.”

      C.   Add the following paragraph to Section 7.10.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
           Buildings and Bridges:

           “The Erector shall have the sole responsibility for determining the means and methods used to
           properly and adequately brace the framing during erection.”

      D.   Revise the second paragraph of Section 7.10.3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
           Buildings and Bridges as follows:

           “The Erector need not consider loads during erection that result from the performance of Work
           by, or the acts of, others, except as specifically identified by the Owner’s Designated Repre-
           sentatives for Design and Construction, nor those that are unpredictable, such as loads due to
           hurricane, tornado, earthquake, explosion or collision. The Erector shall determine, furnish
           and install temporary supports to resist earthquake loads specified by the 2009 Interna-
           tional Building Code for new buildings.”

      E.   Revise Section 7.14 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges as
           follows:

           “The correction of minor misfits by moderate amounts of reaming or grinding, welding or cut-
           ting, and the drawing of elements into line with drift pins, shall be considered to be normal
           erection operations. Errors that cannot be corrected using the foregoing means, or that require
METAL FABRICATIONS                                                              META            55000 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


           major welding, cutting or changes in member or Connection configuration, shall be promptly
           reported to the Owner’s Designated Representatives for Design and Construction and the Fabri-
           cator by the Erector, to enable the responsible entity to either correct the error or approve the
           most efficient and economical method of correction to be used by others.”


           Particular note shall be paid to the commentary for this section of the AISC Code of
           Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, which reads as follows:

           “As used in this Section, the term “moderate” refers to the amount of reaming, grinding, weld-
           ing or cutting that must be done on the project as a whole, not the amount that is required at an
           individual location. It is not intended to address limitations on the amount of material that is
           removed by reaming at an individual bolt hole, for example, which is limited by the bolt-hole
           size and tolerance requirements in the AISC and RCSC Specifications.”


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        METALS, GENERAL

      A.   Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

      B.   Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars, Channels, Angles, Pipe: Refer to General Stuctural Notes.

      C.   Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
           1.   Welding electrodes shall have a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi using AWS A5
                classification test.
           2.   Welding filler metals, as supplied by the manufacturer, shall meet the requirements for
                H16 (16 mL diffusible hydrogen per 100 grams deposited weld metal) as tested using the
                mercury or gas chromatograph method as specified in AWS A4.3, "Standard Methods for
                Determination of Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel
                Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding." The manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance
                shall be considered adequate proof that the supplied electrodes meet this requirement, and
                no additional testing of filler metal samples or of production welds is required.
           3.   All low hydrogen electrodes shall be stored, handled, protected from atmospheric
                exposure and redried, if required, per AWS D1.1, 5.3.
           4.   FCAW electrodes shall be received in moisture-resistant packages that are undamaged.
                They shall be protected against contamination and injury during shipment and storage.
                Electrode packages shall remain effectively sealed against moisture until the electrode is
                required for use. When removed from the protective packaging and installed on
                machines, care shall be taken to protect the electrodes and coatings, if present, from
                deterioration or damage. Modification or lubrication of an electrode after manufacture
                for any reason is not permitted, except drying shall be permitted when recommended by
                the manufacturer.

      D.   Gutters: Stainless steel, commercial grade.

      E.   Downspouts and Drainpipes: Stainless steel or Ductile Iron with coatings per Section 099600
           "High Performance Coatings".

METAL FABRICATIONS                                                              META            55000 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


2.2        FASTENERS

      A.   General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
           and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633.


      B.   Threaded Rods: As indicated.
           1.   Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.
           2.   Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened.
           3.   Finish: Mechanically edeposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

      C.   Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors as indicated.
           1.    Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
                 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
                 (ASTM F 836M).


2.3        MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

      A.   Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
           requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
           Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
           Chambers."

      B.   Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Section 099600 “High
           Performance Coatings”.

      C.   Urethane Coating: Provide coatings that comply with Division 09 Section 099600 “High
           Permformance Coatings”

      D.   Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
           complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
           interior and exterior applications.

      E.   Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
           for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
           5000 psi (20 MPa).


2.4        FABRICATION, GENERAL

      A.   Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections
           that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

      B.   Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
           sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

      C.   Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

           1.   Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
                resistance of base metals.

METAL FABRICATIONS                                                             META            55000 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


           2.    Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
           3.    Remove welding flux immediately.
           4.    At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

      D.   Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
           welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

      E.   Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
           water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

      F.   Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete, equip with integrally welded steel strap
           anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless noted otherwise.


2.5        MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

      A.   General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
           complete the Work.

      B.   Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
           indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
           construction.


2.6        HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS

      A.   Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
           indicated with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
           concealed field splices where possible. Space posts as required to withstand indicated loads.

      B.   Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
           other work.

      C.   Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at
           connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designated for this purpose. Weld all around at
           connections, including fittings.

      D.   Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
           1.   By radius bend or by intersecting prefabricated elbow fittings with radius bends.

      E.   Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature
           for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire
           bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
           components.

      F.   Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings or plates and seal welds

      G.   Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
           of returns.



METAL FABRICATIONS                                                              META             55000 - 7
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


      H.   Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
           miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other
           work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete and precast
           concrete work.
           1.   Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
           2.   Provide ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves.

      I.   Coat handrails and guardrails with zinc-rich primer and Urethane coatings specified in Division
           09 Section 099600 “ High Performance Coatings”.


2.7        LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

      A.   Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
           construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.


2.8        STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

      A.   Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
           concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
           two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.


2.9        FINISHES, GENERAL

      A.   Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
           recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

      B.   Finish metal fabrications after assembly.


2.10       STEEL FINISHES

      A.   Shop prime steel members and steel embedments unless otherwise indicated.

           1.    Shop prime with primers specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings".

      B.   Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with Division 09 Section “High-
           Performance Coatings”

      C.   Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
           No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

      D.   Primer Repair: Use Power tool cleaning to metal 1” all around areas damaged or disrupted by
           welding per SSPC SP-11 “Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal”.

      E.   High Performance Coating; Shop applied.




METAL FABRICATIONS                                                            META            55000 - 8
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        INSTALLATION, GENERAL

      A.   Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
           metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
           edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
           levels.

      B.   Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
           not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
           Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
           fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

      C.   Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

           1.    Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
                 resistance of base metals.
           2.    Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
           3.    Remove welding flux immediately.
           4.    At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

      D.   Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
           fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

      E.   Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
           masonry, or similar construction.

      F.   Repair Painting: Clean and prepare damaged surfaces or welded areas prior to reapplication of
           primer and Urethane coating. Comply with manufacturer’s requirements and the requirements
           of Division 9 Section 099600 “High Performance Coatings”.


3.2        INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

      A.   Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
           improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

      B.   Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
           been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
           protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

      C.   Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


3.3        INSTALLING HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS

      A.   Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment with abutting joints.
           Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in
           each direction.

METAL FABRICATIONS                                                              META             55000 - 9
KPFF Job # 208586.11            City Centre Stair Replacement Project                   01/27/2011


3.4        ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

      A.   Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
           abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
           painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up painted surfaces.

      B.   Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
           galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


END OF SECTION 055000




METAL FABRICATIONS                                                       META           55000 - 10
KPFF Job # 208586.11                  City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011


SECTION 071800 - TRAFFIC COATINGS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS
      A.   General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
           Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2        SUMMARY
      A.   Section Includes:

           1.    Waterproofing and pedestrian traffic coating for elevated slabs, slab on grade, slab on metal
                 deck, and concrete stair treads
      B.   Related Sections:

           1.    Division 07 Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” for crack sealing.

1.3        SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
      A.   Pedestrian traffic coating: Apply fluid-applied polyurethane waterproofing coating consisting of
           fast-setting 2-component reactive curing mechanism with very low odor. VOC compliant.
      B.
           1.    Deck coating system:

                 a.     Crack filler: One component, non-sag, gun grade polyeurethane, suitable for traffic use.
                 b.     Primer: 2-component polyurethane-based adhesive primer.
                 c.     Base coat: 2-component fast-curing polyurethane base coat.
                 d.     Top coat: 2-component aliphatic 100 percent solids, fast-curing topcoat with UV
                        resistance.

           2.    Color: Gray.


1.4        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: Submit for each traffic coating product indicated.

      B.   Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured traffic
           coatings showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.


1.5        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Qualification Data: Submit for qualified Installer.

      B.   Product Certificates: Submit for each kind of traffic coating and accessory, from manufacturer.




TRAFFIC COATINGS                                                                                       071800 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11                 City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011

      C.   Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: Submit for each
           coating system specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

      D.   Product Test Reports: Submit reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
           qualified testing agency, indicating that traffic coatings comply with requirements.

      E.   Warranties: Submit sample of special warranties.
      F.   Project References: Submit list of project references to document compliance with requirements
           under Section 071800.1.6. “Quality Assurance”. Include contact name and phone number of person
           charged with oversight of each project.


1.6        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained
           and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

           1.    Installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing product selected on similar
                 projects.

      B.   Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of traffic coating from single source from single manufacturer.


1.7        PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.   Contractor shall not proceed with installation of coating systems under the following conditions:


           1.    When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by coating
                 manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
           2.    When substrates are wet.
           3.    Where cracks, voids, or areas of delamination have not been patched or repaired in accordance
                 with coating manufacturer’s requirements.
           4.    Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
                 substrates.

  B.       Ambient moisture mitigation at existing slab on grade:

           1.    Perform moisture testing to verify slab on grade substrate meets manufacturer’s requirements
                 for moisture content.
           2.    Provide moisture mitigation coating system if required to prevent loss of adhesion and voiding
                 warranty. Moisture mitigation coating system shall be compatible with other products
                 selected.


1.8        WARRANTY

      A.   Special Installer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to
           repair or replace traffic coatings that do not comply with performance and other requirements
           specified in this Section within specified warranty period.




TRAFFIC COATINGS                                                                                      071800 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11                  City Centre Stair Replacement Project                            01/27/2011

           1.    Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
           2.    Warranty terms shall include mitigation of ambient moisture content of existing slab on grade.

      B.   Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard form in which traffic coatings
           manufacturer agrees to furnish traffic coatings to repair or replace those that do not comply with
           performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

           1.    Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
           2.    Warranty terms shall include mitigation of ambient moisture content of existing slab on grade.

      C.   Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of traffic coatings from the
           following:

           1.    Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or
                 construction resulting in stresses on the coating exceeding coating manufacturer's written
                 specifications for coating elongation and compression.
           2.    Disintegration of coating substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
           3.    Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
           4.    Changes in coating appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
                 contaminants.
      D.   Deterioration of traffic coatings includes the following:

           1.    Adhesive or cohesive failures.
           2.    Abrasion or tearing failures.
           3.    Surface crazing or spalling.
           4.    Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into the deck
                 substrate.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1        MATERIALS, GENERAL
      A.   Compatibility: Provide primer, base coat, top coat, and other related materials that are compatible
           with one another and with substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
           coating manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
      B.   Colors of coating system: Gray, as selected by Owner from manufacturer’s full range.
      C.   Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

           1.    Peda-Gard LT; Neogard.
           2.    Vulkem 951NF/360NF; Tremco.
           3.    CCW-5013; Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing.
           4.    GacoFlex E-5511/UB-64/UB-66; GacoFlex.
           5.    Conipur II; BASF Building Systems.




TRAFFIC COATINGS                                                                                         071800 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11                  City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1        EXAMINATION
      A.   Comply with Division 1 Section 017300 "Execution".

3.2        SURFACE PREPARATION
      A.   Substrates:


           1.    Ensure substrates are sound and free of dust, dirt, laitance, paints, oils, grease, curing
                 compounds, or any other contaminants prior to removal of existing surface treatments.
           2.    Mechanically prepare substrate to remove pervious coatings, laitance, and miscellaneous
                 surface contamination. Shotblast surface to profile equal to International Concrete Repair
                 Institutes CSP 3.

                 a.      Roughen or brush blast extremely smooth surfaces to ensure good mechanical adhesion.
                 b.      Patch holes and cracks before installation.
                 c.      At areas that are not large enough to support shotblast equipment, such as stair treads,
                         and in corners, use grinders with abrasive blades, strippers, needle gun, or other hand
                         and power tools to achieve required surface profile. Consult manufacturer for approved
                         methods.

3.3        APPLICATION – GENERAL
      A.   Surface Prestriping and Detailing:

           1.    Prestripe with primer 1 inch (25 mm) beyond surfaces that require detail Work, using short-
                 nap roller.
           2.    For nonmoving joints and cracks less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) wide, apply 25 to 30 wet mils
                 (0.6 to 0.8 mm) prestriping of base coat over cured primer. Apply base coat to fill and overlap
                 joint or crack 3 inches (76 mm) on each side. Feather edges.
           3.    Route dynamic cracks and joints over 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to minimum of 1/4 inch by 1/4 inch
                 (6 by 6 mm) and clean. Install bond breaker tape to prevent adhesion to bottom of joint.
                 Prime joint faces only with sealant primer and fill with sealant. Fill joints deeper than 1/4 inch
                 (6 mm) with backer rod and deep joint sealant. For cracks, apply sealant flush with adjacent
                 surface. For expansion joints, apply sealant slightly concave.
           4.    Coat sealed joints 1 inch (25 mm) or less with deck coating system.
           5.    Do not coat expansion joints exceeding 1 inch (25 mm) wide, including primary wide
                 expansion-joint system.
           6.    Where coating system will be terminated and no wall, joint, or other break exists, cut 1/4 inch
                 by 1/4 inch (6 by 6 mm) keyway into concrete. Fill and coat keyway as application of base
                 coat progresses.
      B.   Metal Surfaces:

           1.    Remove dust, debris, and other contaminants from vent, drain pipe, and post penetrations;
                 reglets, and other metal surfaces. Clean surfaces to bright metal and prime with sealant
                 primer. Provide cant with deep joint sealant to eliminate 90-degree angles.
           2.    Detail cant with primer and base coat per manufacturer requirements prior to application of
                 deck coating system.


TRAFFIC COATINGS                                                                                        071800 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11                 City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011

3.4        TRAFFIC TOPPING APPLICATION FOR LIGHT TO MEDIUM DUTY SYSTEM
      A.   Minimum coating thickness and curing:
           1.    Apply minimum 4 wet mils (0.1 mm) of primer.
           2.    Apply minimum 25 wet mils (0.5 mm) of base coat. Allow base coat to dry minimum 3 to 4
                 hours.
           3.    Apply minimum 15 wet mils (0.4 mm) of top coat.
           4.    Immediately broadcast silicon dioxide aggregate at rate of 10 to 15 pounds per 100 square feet
                 (0.5 to 0.75 kg/sm) into wet top coat. Coat and backroll to encapsulate. Allow to cure.
           5.    Comply with manufacturer’s additional requirements for curing and coating thicknesses.

3.5        STRIPING
      A.   Contractor shall provide safety yellow striping at stair nosing. Striping selected shall be compatible
           with selected traffic topping system. Stripping at stair treads shall be a minimum of 3” wide.

3.6        CLEANING
      A.   Contractor shall clean up and properly dispose of debris remaining on Project site related to
           application.
      B.   Contractor shall remove temporary coverings and protection from adjacent Work areas.


END OF SECTION 0171800




TRAFFIC COATINGS                                                                                      071800 - 5
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011



SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS


PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
           Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section Includes:

           1.    Urethane joint sealants.

      B.   Related Sections:

           1.    Division 07 Section 071800 "Traffic Coatings" for sealing floor joints.


1.3        ACTION SUBMITTALS

      A.   Product Data: Submit for each joint-sealant product indicated.

      B.   Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
           sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.


1.4        INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

      A.   Qualification Data: Submit for qualified Installer.

      B.   Product Certificates: Submit for each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

      C.   Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: Submit for
           each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

      D.   Product Test Reports: Submit reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
           a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

      E.   Warranties: Submit sample of special warranties.


1.5        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be manufacturer's authorized representative who is
           trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.




JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                  079200 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011



           1.    Installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing product selected on
                 similar projects.

      B.   Source Limitations:     Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
           manufacturer.


1.6        PROJECT CONDITIONS

      A.   Contractor shall not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

           1.    When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
                 sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
           2.    When joint substrates are wet.
           3.    Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
                 applications indicated.
           4.    Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
                 from joint substrates.


1.7        WARRANTY

      A.   Special Installer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to
           repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
           specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

           1.    Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

      B.   Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
           manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
           performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

           1.    Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

      C.   Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
           the following:

           1.    Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
                 or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
                 written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
           2.    Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
           3.    Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
           4.    Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
                 contaminants.




JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                     079200 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                           01/27/2011


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1        MATERIALS, GENERAL

      A.   Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
           with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
           demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

      B.   Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.


2.2        URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

      A.   Immersible, Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
           Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.

           1.    Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

                 a.     BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.
                 b.     Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
                 c.     Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.


2.3        JOINT SEALANT BACKING

      A.   General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
           substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
           by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

      B.   Cylindrical Sealant Backings: Provide ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a
           surface skin, Type O open-cell material, Type B bicellular material with a surface skin, or any
           of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application
           indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
           optimum sealant performance.

      C.   Bond-Breaker Tape: Provide polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
           manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
           joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


2.4        MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

      A.   Primer: Provide material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
           adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-
           sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

      B.   Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Use chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
           sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
           staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated
           to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.



JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                     079200 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011


      C.   Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
           surfaces adjacent to joints.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1        EXAMINATION

      A.   Contractor shall examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
           compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other
           conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

      B.   Contractor shall proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
           corrected.


3.2        PREPARATION

      A.   Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
           comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

           1.    Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
                 joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
                 approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
                 sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
           2.    Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
                 combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
                 optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
                 operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
                 Porous joint substrates include the following:

                 a.     Concrete.

           3.    Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

      B.   Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
           indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
           comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
           sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

      C.   Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
           adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
           by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
           without disturbing joint seal.


3.3        INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

      A.   General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
           and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.



JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                   079200 - 4
KPFF Job # 208586.11              City Centre Stair Replacement Project                            01/27/2011


      B.   Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
           sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

      C.   Sealant Backing: Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during
           application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed
           sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

           1.    Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
           2.    Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
           3.    Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
                 replace them with dry materials.

      D.   Bond Breaker Tape: Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not
           used between sealants and backs of joints.

      E.   Installation Techniques: Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following
           and at the same time backings are installed:

           1.    Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
           2.    Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
           3.    Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
                 optimum sealant movement capability.

      F.   Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
           curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
           smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
           contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

           1.    Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
           2.    Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
                 discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
           3.    Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
                 indicated.
           4.    Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
           5.    Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
                 Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

                 a.     Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.


3.4        CLEANING

      A.   Contractor shall clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work
           progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of
           joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


3.5        PROTECTION

      A.   Contractor shall protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with
           contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other



JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                     079200 - 5
KPFF Job # 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                        01/27/2011


           causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
           despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
           deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable
           from original work.


3.6        JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

      A.   Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

           1.    Joint Locations:

                 a.     Apply to non-moving and dynamic cracks in horizontal surfaces as required for
                        traffic topping installation per manufacturer’s requirements.
                 b.     Joints between different materials and structural elements.
                 c.     Joints between individual precast stair elements.

           2.    Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade.
           3.    Joint-Sealant Color: Gray.

END OF SECTION 079200




JOINT SEALANTS                                                                                    079200 - 6
KPFF Job # 208586.11               City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011




SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS




PART 1 - GENERAL


1.1        RELATED DOCUMENTS

      A.   Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
           Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this section


1.2        SUMMARY

      A.   Section Includes:

           1.    Surface Preparation.
           2.    Primer.
           3.    High Performance Coating.

1.3        REFERENCE STANDARDS

  A.       ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

  B.       SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings.

  C.       SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings.

  D..      SSPC-SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal; Society for Protective Coatings.

1.4        PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

  A.       Provide coating systems that meet the following minimum performance criteria, unless more
           stringent criteria are specified:

           1.   Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0, maximum,
                when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
           2.   Impact resistance: 100 inch pounds, using Gardener Impact Tester over 1/8” steel, when
                tested in accordance with ASTM D2794.
           3.   Flexibility: greater than 6%, when tested in accordance with ASTM D522.
           4.   Adhesion: 585 psi (Elcometer), when tested in accordance with ASTM D4541.
           5.   Water resistance: No rusting of the scribe, blistering, softening, or discoloration, when
                tested in accordance with ASTM D870.


HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS                                                                      099600 - 1
KPFF Job # 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                       01/27/2011




1.5        SUBMITTALS

  A.       See section 013300 "Submittal Procedures".

  B.       Product Data: Provide data indicating coating materials .

  C.       Samples: Submit two samples 4x4inch in size illustrating colors available for selection.

  D.       Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
           requiring special attention.

  E.       Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

  F.       Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repair and patching techniques.

  G.       Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Capital City Development Corporation’s use
           in maintenance of project.
           1.   Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon of each type and color.
           2.   Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room
                names and numbers where used.

1.7        FIELD CONDITIONS

  A.       Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
  B.       Maintain this temperature range 24 hours before and during, and 72 hours after installation of
           coating.
  C.       Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing

1.8        WARRANTY

  A.       Installers warranty: 1 year. See section 017700 Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty
           requirements.

  B.       Manufacturer’s warranty: 5 years. See section 017700 Closeout Submittals, for additional
           warranty requirements.

1.9        QUALITY ASSURANCE

      A.   Verification of High Performance Coating Application: Retain NACE or SSPC certified special
           inspector to verify the following procedures conform to manufacturer’s requirements and
           referenced standards of the contract documents:


           1.    Mixture and thinning of primer and coating
           2.    Surface preparation of shop primed embedments and members.
           3.    Preparation of substrate prior to primer application.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS                                                                        099600 - 2
KPFF Job # 208586.11                City Centre Stair Replacement Project                         01/27/2011




            4.    Condition of primer in field prior at time of receiving shop primed elements.
            5.    Procedures for touch up of welded items or damaged areas.

      B.    Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be manufacturer's authorized representative who is
            trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. Installer shall have a
            minimum of 5 years experience installing product selected on similar projects.

      C.    Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of coating from single source from single manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1         MANUFACTURERS

  A.        High-Performance Coatings: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide coating system
            by one of the following manufacturers:

            1.   Carboline Company; : www.carboline.com.
            2.   PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc;: www.ppgaf.com.
            3.   Tnemec Company, Inc; : www.tnemec.com.

2.2        MATERIALS
  A.       Coatings - General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by
           manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats
           specified does not include primer or filler coat.
  B.       High-Build Urethane Coating: Two coats, two-part, aliphatic moisture-curing polyurethane,
           gloss finish, 6 to 12 mill total dry film thickness.

  C.       Primers: Zinc rich, organic, as recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1         EXAMINATION

  A.       Verify existing conditions before starting work.

  B.       Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating
           manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of
           substrates.

3.2 PREPARATION

  A.       Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter.

  B.       Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface
           with shellac.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS                                                                         099600 - 3
KPFF Job # 208586.11            City Centre Stair Replacement Project                          01/27/2011




  C.    Ferrous Metal:
        1.   Solvent clean.
        2.   Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using Commercial Blast
             Cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6.

  G.    Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask
        if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage.

3.3     PRIMING

  A.    Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in
        accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.

3.4      COATING APPLICATION
  A.    Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to thicknesses specified.

  B.    Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in
        color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with
        full coating thickness.

3.5      CLEANING

  A.    Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
        remove daily from site.

  B.   Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material.

3.6    PROTECTION

  A.    Protect finished work from damage.

3.7 SCHEDULE

  A.    Colors: As selected by Owner from full range of available colors.



END OF SECTION




HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS                                                                       099600 - 4
                                         PART 4


                                      DRAWINGS

Drawings prepared by KPFF and dated 1/27/2011 on 11” x 17” sheets follow this page. Full
sized drawings are separately bound and available for review at:

      CCDC’s office, 121 N. 9th Street, Suite 501, Boise ID 83702; 208-384-4264
      Idaho Associated General Contractors plan room, 1649 W. Shoreline Dr, Suite 100,
       Boise ID 83702; 208-344-2531




INVITATION TO BID – CITY CENTRE GARAGE STAIR REPLCEMENT PROJECT                  Page 24 of 24
PROJECT MANUAL – FEBRUARY 8, 2011

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Stats:
views:40
posted:7/18/2011
language:English
pages:223